CY8C3666LTI-027T [CYPRESS]

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, QFN-68;
CY8C3666LTI-027T
型号: CY8C3666LTI-027T
厂家: CYPRESS    CYPRESS
描述:

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, QFN-68

多功能外围设备 微控制器和处理器 时钟
文件: 总126页 (文件大小:4339K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
General Description  
With its unique array of configurable blocks, PSoC® 3 is a true system level solution providing microcontroller unit (MCU), memory,  
analog, and digital peripheral functions in a single chip. The CY8C36 family offers a modern method of signal acquisition, signal  
processing, and control with high accuracy, high bandwidth, and high flexibility. Analog capability spans the range from thermocouples  
(near DC voltages) to ultrasonic signals. The CY8C36 family can handle dozens of data acquisition channels and analog inputs on  
every general-purpose input/output (GPIO) pin. The CY8C36 family is also a high-performance configurable digital system with some  
part numbers including interfaces such as USB, multi-master inter-integrated circuit (I2C), and controller area network (CAN). In  
addition to communication interfaces, the CY8C36 family has an easy to configure logic array, flexible routing to all I/O pins, and  
current DAC a high-performance single cycle 8051 microprocessor core. You can easily create system-level designs using a rich  
library of prebuilt components and boolean primitives using PSoC Creator™, a hierarchical schematic design entry tool. The CY8C36  
family provides unparalleled opportunities for analog and digital bill of materials integration while easily accommodating last minute  
design changes through simple firmware updates.  
‡ 67-MHz, 24-bit fixed point digital filter block (DFB) to  
implement finite impulse response (FIR) and infinite impulse  
response (IIR) filters  
‡ Library of standard peripherals  
Features  
„ Single cycle 8051 CPU core  
‡ DC to 67 MHz operation  
‡ Multiply and divide instructions  
‡ Flash program memory, up to 64 KB, 100,000 write cycles,  
20 years retention, and multiple security features  
‡ Up to 8-KB flash error correcting code (ECC) or configuration  
storage  
• 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit timers, counters, and PWMs  
• Serial peripheral interface (SPI), universal asynchronous  
transmitter receiver (UART), I2C  
• Many others available in catalog  
‡ Library of advanced peripherals  
‡ Up to 8 KB SRAM  
• Cyclic redundancy check (CRC)  
‡ Up to 2 KB electrically erasable programmable  
read-only memory (EEPROM), 1 M cycles, and 20 years  
retention  
• Pseudo random sequence (PRS) generator  
• Local interconnect network (LIN) bus 2.0  
• Quadrature decoder  
‡ 24-channel direct memory access (DMA) with multilayer  
„ Analog peripherals (1.71 V VDDA 5.5 V)  
‡ 1.024 V ± 0.1% internal voltage reference across –40 °C to  
+85 °C (14 ppm/°C)  
‡ Configurable delta-sigma ADC with 8- to12-bit resolution  
• Programmable gain stage: ×0.25 to ×16  
• 12-bit mode, 192-ksps, 66-dB signal to noise and distortion  
ratio (SINAD), ±1-bit INL/DNL  
‡ Up to four 8-bit, 8-Msps IDACs or 1-Msps VDACs  
‡ Four comparators with 95-ns response time  
‡ Up to four uncommitted opamps with 25 mA drive capability  
‡ Up to four configurable multifunction analog blocks. Example  
configurations are programmable gain amplifier (PGA),  
transimpedance amplifier (TIA), mixer, and sample and hold  
‡ CapSense support  
AHB[1] bus access  
• Programmable chained descriptors and priorities  
• High bandwidth 32-bit transfer support  
„ Low voltage, ultra low-power  
‡ Wide operating voltage range: 0.5 V to 5.5 V  
‡ High efficiency boost regulator from 0.5-V input through  
1.8-V to 5.0-V output  
‡ 0.8 mA at 3 MHz, 1.2 mA at 6 MHz, 6.6 mA at 48 MHz  
‡ Low-power modes including:  
• 1-µA sleep mode with real-time clock (RTC) and  
low-voltage detect (LVD) interrupt  
• 200-nA hibernate mode with RAM retention  
„ Versatile I/O system  
‡ 28 to 72 I/O (62 GPIOs, eight special input/outputs (SIO), two  
USBIOs[2]  
„ Programming, debug, and trace  
‡ JTAG (4-wire), serial wire debug (SWD) (2-wire), and single  
‡ Any GPIO to any digital or analog peripheral routability  
‡ LCD direct drive from any GPIO, up to 46 × 16 segments[2]  
‡ CapSense® support from any GPIO[3]  
‡ 1.2-V to 5.5-V I/O interface voltages, up to four domains  
‡ Maskable, independent interrupt request (IRQ) on any pin or  
port  
‡ Schmitt-trigger transistor-transistor logic (TTL) inputs  
‡ All GPIO configurable as open drain high/low,  
pull-up/pull-down, High Z, or strong output  
‡ Configurable GPIO pin state at power-on reset (POR)  
‡ 25 mA sink on SIO  
wire viewer (SWV) interfaces  
‡ Eight address and one data breakpoint  
‡ 4-KB instruction trace buffer  
‡ Bootloader programming supportable through I2C, SPI,  
UART, USB, and other interfaces  
„ Precision, programmable clocking  
‡ 3- to 62-MHz internal oscillator over full temperature and  
voltage range  
‡ 4- to 25-MHz crystal oscillator for crystal PPM accuracy  
‡ Internal PLL clock generation up to 67 MHz  
‡ 32.768 kHz watch crystal oscillator  
‡ Low-power internal oscillator at 1, 33, and 100 kHz  
„ Temperature and packaging  
‡ –40 °C to +85 °C degrees industrial temperature  
‡ 48-pin SSOP, 48-pin QFN, 68-pin QFN, and 100-pin TQFP  
package options  
„ Digital peripherals  
‡ 20 to 24 programmable logic devices (PLD) based universal  
digital blocks (UDB)  
‡ Full CAN 2.0b 16-receive (Rx), 8-transmit (Tx) buffers[2]  
‡ Full-Speed (FS) USB 2.0 12 Mbps using internal oscillator[2]  
‡ Up to four 16-bit configurable timer, counter, and PWM blocks  
Notes  
1. AHB – AMBA (advanced microcontroller bus architecture) high-performance bus, an ARM data transfer bus  
2. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 114 for details.  
3. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
Cypress Semiconductor Corporation  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
198 Champion Court  
San Jose, CA 95134-1709  
408-943-2600  
Revised May 20, 2011  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Contents  
1. Architectural Overview ..................................................... 3  
2. Pinouts ............................................................................... 5  
3. Pin Descriptions .............................................................. 10  
8.6 LCD Direct Drive ...................................................... 56  
8.7 CapSense ................................................................. 57  
8.8 Temp Sensor ............................................................ 57  
8.9 DAC .......................................................................... 57  
8.10 Up/Down Mixer ....................................................... 58  
8.11 Sample and Hold .................................................... 58  
4. CPU ................................................................................... 11  
4.1 8051 CPU ................................................................. 11  
4.2 Addressing Modes .................................................... 11  
4.3 Instruction Set .......................................................... 11  
4.4 DMA and PHUB ....................................................... 15  
4.5 Interrupt Controller ................................................... 17  
9. Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources ................ 59  
9.1 JTAG Interface ......................................................... 59  
9.2 Serial Wire Debug Interface ..................................... 61  
9.3 Debug Features ........................................................ 62  
9.4 Trace Features ......................................................... 62  
9.5 Single Wire Viewer Interface .................................... 62  
9.6 Programming Features ............................................. 62  
9.7 Device Security ........................................................ 62  
5. Memory ............................................................................. 20  
5.1 Static RAM ............................................................... 20  
5.2 Flash Program Memory ............................................ 20  
5.3 Flash Security ........................................................... 20  
5.4 EEPROM .................................................................. 21  
5.5 Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs) ...................................... 21  
5.6 External Memory Interface ....................................... 22  
5.7 Memory Map ............................................................ 22  
10. Development Support ................................................... 63  
10.1 Documentation ....................................................... 63  
10.2 Online ..................................................................... 63  
10.3 Tools ....................................................................... 63  
6. System Integration .......................................................... 25  
6.1 Clocking System ....................................................... 25  
6.2 Power System .......................................................... 28  
6.3 Reset ........................................................................ 31  
6.4 I/O System and Routing ........................................... 32  
11. Electrical Specifications ............................................... 64  
11.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................... 64  
11.2 Device Level Specifications .................................... 65  
11.3 Power Regulators ................................................... 69  
11.4 Inputs and Outputs ................................................. 73  
11.5 Analog Peripherals ................................................. 80  
11.6 Digital Peripherals .................................................. 97  
11.7 Memory ................................................................ 101  
11.8 PSoC System Resources ..................................... 107  
11.9 Clocking ................................................................ 110  
7. Digital Subsystem ........................................................... 38  
7.1 Example Peripherals ................................................ 39  
7.2 Universal Digital Block .............................................. 42  
7.3 UDB Array Description ............................................. 45  
7.4 DSI Routing Interface Description ............................ 45  
7.5 CAN .......................................................................... 47  
7.6 USB .......................................................................... 48  
7.7 Timers, Counters, and PWMs .................................. 49  
7.8 I2C ............................................................................ 49  
7.9 Digital Filter Block ..................................................... 50  
12. Ordering Information ................................................... 114  
12.1 Part Numbering Conventions ............................... 115  
13. Packaging ..................................................................... 116  
14. Acronyms ..................................................................... 119  
15. Reference Documents ................................................. 120  
8. Analog Subsystem .......................................................... 50  
8.1 Analog Routing ......................................................... 51  
8.2 Delta-sigma ADC ...................................................... 53  
8.3 Comparators ............................................................. 54  
8.4 Opamps .................................................................... 55  
8.5 Programmable SC/CT Blocks .................................. 55  
16. Document Conventions .............................................. 121  
16.1 Units of Measure .................................................. 121  
17. Revision History .......................................................... 122  
18. Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information ................... 126  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 2 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
1. Architectural Overview  
Introducing the CY8C36 family of ultra low-power, flash Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®) devices, part of a scalable 8-bit  
PSoC 3 and 32-bit PSoC 5 platform. The CY8C36 family provides configurable blocks of analog, digital, and interconnect circuitry  
around a CPU subsystem. The combination of a CPU with a flexible analog subsystem, digital subsystem, routing, and I/O enables  
a high level of integration in a wide variety of consumer, industrial, and medical applications.  
Figure 1-1. Simplified Block Diagram  
Analog Interconnect  
Digital Interconnect  
Digital System  
System Wide  
Resources  
I2C  
Master/  
Slave  
Universal Digital Block Array (24x UDB)  
CAN  
2.0  
8- Bit  
Timer  
Quadrature Decoder  
16- Bit PRS  
16- Bit  
PWM  
to 25 MHz  
( Optional)  
4
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
22 Ω  
Xtal  
Osc  
USB  
PHY  
UDB  
FS USB  
2.0  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
I2C Slave  
UDB  
8- Bit  
Timer  
4x  
8- Bit SPI  
Logic  
Timer  
Counter  
PWM  
12- Bit SPI  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
IMO  
Logic  
32.768 KHz  
( Optional)  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UART  
12- Bit PWM  
RTC  
Timer  
System Bus  
Program &  
Debug  
Memory System  
CPU System  
WDT  
and  
Wake  
8051or  
Cortex M3CPU  
Interrupt  
Controller  
EEPROM  
SRAM  
Program  
Debug  
Trace  
&
PHUB  
DMA  
FLASH  
EMIF  
Boundary  
Scan  
ILO  
Clocking System  
Analog System  
ADC  
Digital  
Filter  
Block  
Power Management  
System  
LCD Direct  
Drive  
+
4 x  
Opamp  
POR and  
LVD  
3 per  
Opamp  
-
4 x SC/ CT Blocks  
(TIA, PGA, Mixer etc)  
Sleep  
Power  
Del Sig  
ADC  
+
4 x  
CMP  
-
Temperature  
Sensor  
1.8 V LDO  
SMP  
4 x DAC  
CapSense  
0. 5 to5.5V  
(Optional)  
Figure 1-1 illustrates the major components of the CY8C36  
family. They are:  
PSoC’s digital subsystem provides half of its unique  
configurability. It connects a digital signal from any peripheral to  
any pin through the digital system interconnect (DSI). It also  
provides functional flexibility through an array of small, fast,  
low-power UDBs. PSoC Creator provides a library of prebuilt and  
tested standard digital peripherals (UART, SPI, LIN, PRS, CRC,  
timer, counter, PWM, AND, OR, and so on) that are mapped to  
the UDB array. You can also easily create a digital circuit using  
boolean primitives by means of graphical design entry. Each  
UDB contains programmable array logic (PAL)/programmable  
logic device (PLD) functionality, together with a small state  
machine engine to support a wide variety of peripherals.  
„ 8051 CPU subsystem  
„ Nonvolatile subsystem  
„ Programming, debug, and test subsystem  
„ Inputs and outputs  
„ Clocking  
„ Power  
„ Digital subsystem  
„ Analog subsystem  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 3 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
In addition to the flexibility of the UDB array, PSoC also provides  
configurable digital blocks targeted at specific functions. For the  
CY8C36 family these blocks can include four 16-bit timers,  
counters, and PWM blocks; I2C slave, master, and multi-master;  
FS USB; and Full CAN 2.0b.  
See the “Analog Subsystem” section on page 50 of this data  
sheet for more details.  
PSoC’s 8051 CPU subsystem is built around a single-cycle  
pipelined 8051 8-bit processor running at up to 67 MHz. The  
CPU subsystem includes a programmable nested vector  
interrupt controller, DMA controller, and RAM. PSoC’s nested  
vector interrupt controller provides low latency by allowing the  
CPU to vector directly to the first address of the interrupt service  
routine, bypassing the jump instruction required by other  
architectures. The DMA controller enables peripherals to  
exchange data without CPU involvement. This allows the CPU  
to run slower (saving power) or use those CPU cycles to improve  
the performance of firmware algorithms. The single cycle 8051  
CPU runs ten times faster than a standard 8051 processor. The  
processor speed itself is configurable, allowing you to tune active  
power consumption for specific applications.  
For more details on the peripherals see the “Example  
Peripherals” section on page 39 of this data sheet. For  
information on UDBs, DSI, and other digital blocks, see the  
“Digital Subsystem” section on page 38 of this data sheet.  
PSoC’s analog subsystem is the second half of its unique  
configurability. All analog performance is based on a highly  
accurate absolute voltage reference with less than 0.1-percent  
error over temperature and voltage. The configurable analog  
subsystem includes:  
„ Analog muxes  
„ Comparators  
„ Voltage references  
„ ADC  
PSoC’s nonvolatile subsystem consists of flash, byte-writeable  
EEPROM, and nonvolatile configuration options. It provides up  
to 64 KB of on-chip flash. The CPU can reprogram individual  
blocks of flash, enabling bootloaders. You can enable an ECC  
for high reliability applications. A powerful and flexible protection  
model secures the user's sensitive information, allowing  
„ DACs  
„ DFB  
selective memory block locking for read and write protection. Up  
to 2 KB of byte-writeable EEPROM is available on-chip to store  
application data. Additionally, selected configuration options  
such as boot speed and pin drive mode are stored in nonvolatile  
memory. This allows settings to activate immediately after POR.  
All GPIO pins can route analog signals into and out of the device  
using the internal analog bus. This allows the device to interface  
up to 62 discrete analog signals. The heart of the analog  
subsystem is a fast, accurate, configurable delta-sigma ADC  
with these features:  
The three types of PSoC I/O are extremely flexible. All I/Os have  
many drive modes that are set at POR. PSoC also provides up  
to four I/O voltage domains through the VDDIO pins. Every GPIO  
has analog I/O, LCD drive[4], CapSense[5], flexible interrupt  
generation, slew rate control, and digital I/O capability. The SIOs  
on PSoC allow VOH to be set independently of VDDIO when used  
as outputs. When SIOs are in input mode they are high  
impedance. This is true even when the device is not powered or  
when the pin voltage goes above the supply voltage. This makes  
the SIO ideally suited for use on an I2C bus where the PSoC may  
not be powered when other devices on the bus are. The SIO pins  
also have high current sink capability for applications such as  
LED drives. The programmable input threshold feature of the  
SIO can be used to make the SIO function as a general purpose  
analog comparator. For devices with FS USB the USB physical  
interface is also provided (USBIO). When not using USB these  
pins may also be used for limited digital functionality and device  
programming. All of the features of the PSoC I/Os are covered  
in detail in the “I/O System and Routing” section on page 32 of  
this data sheet.  
„ Less than 100 µV offset  
„ A gain error of 0.2 percent  
„ INL less than ±1 LSB  
„ DNL less than ±1 LSB  
„ SINAD better than 66 dB  
This converter addresses a wide variety of precision analog  
applications, including some of the most demanding sensors.  
The output of the ADC can optionally feed the programmable  
DFB through the DMA without CPU intervention. You can  
configure the DFB to perform IIR and FIR digital filters and  
several user-defined custom functions. The DFB can implement  
filters with up to 64 taps. It can perform a 48-bit  
multiply-accumulate (MAC) operation in one clock cycle.  
Four high-speed voltage or current DACs support 8-bit output  
signals at an update rate of up to 8 Msps. They can be routed  
out of any GPIO pin. You can create higher resolution voltage  
PWM DAC outputs using the UDB array. This can be used to  
create a PWM DAC of up to 10 bits, at up to 48 kHz. The digital  
DACs in each UDB support PWM, PRS, or delta-sigma  
algorithms with programmable widths.  
The PSoC device incorporates flexible internal clock generators,  
designed for high stability and factory trimmed for high accuracy.  
The internal main oscillator (IMO) is the master clock base for  
the system, and has 1-percent accuracy at 3 MHz. The IMO can  
be configured to run from 3 MHz up to 62 MHz. Multiple clock  
derivatives can be generated from the main clock frequency to  
meet application needs. The device provides a PLL to generate  
system clock frequencies up to 67 MHz from the IMO, external  
crystal, or external reference clock. It also contains a separate,  
very low-power internal low speed oscillator (ILO) for the sleep  
and watchdog timers. A 32.768-kHz external watch crystal is  
also supported for use in RTC applications. The clocks, together  
with programmable clock dividers, provide the flexibility to  
integrate most timing requirements.  
In addition to the ADC, DACs, and DFB, the analog subsystem  
provides multiple:  
„ Uncommitted opamps  
„ Configurable switched capacitor/continuous time (SC/CT)  
blocks. These support:  
‡ Transimpedance amplifiers  
‡ Programmable gain amplifiers  
‡ Mixers  
‡ Other similar analog components  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 4 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
The CY8C36 family supports a wide supply operating range from  
1.71 to 5.5 V. This allows operation from regulated supplies such  
as 1.8 ± 5%, 2.5 V ±10%, 3.3 V ± 10%, or 5.0 V ± 10%, or directly  
from a wide range of battery types. In addition, it provides an  
integrated high efficiency synchronous boost converter that can  
power the device from supply voltages as low as 0.5 V. This  
enables the device to be powered directly from a single battery  
or solar cell. In addition, you can use the boost converter to  
generate other voltages required by the device, such as a 3.3-V  
supply for LCD glass drive. The boost’s output is available on the  
(4-wire) or SWD (2-wire) interfaces for programming, debug, and  
test. The 1-wire SWV may also be used for ‘printf’ style  
debugging. By combining SWD and SWV, you can implement a  
full debugging interface with just three pins. Using these  
standard interfaces enables you to debug or program the PSoC  
with a variety of hardware solutions from Cypress or third party  
vendors. PSoC supports on-chip break points and 4-KB  
instruction and data race memory for debug. Details of the  
programming, test, and debugging interfaces are discussed in  
the “Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources” section on  
page 59 of this data sheet.  
VBOOST pin, allowing other devices in the application to be  
powered from the PSoC.  
2. Pinouts  
PSoC supports a wide range of low-power modes. These include  
a 200-nA hibernate mode with RAM retention and a 1-µA sleep  
mode with RTC. In the second mode the optional 32.768-kHz  
watch crystal runs continuously and maintains an accurate RTC.  
The Vddio pin that supplies a particular set of pins is indicated  
by the black lines drawn on the pinout diagrams in Figure 2-1  
through Figure 2-4. Using the Vddio pins, a single PSoC can  
support multiple interface voltage levels, eliminating the need for  
off-chip level shifters. Each Vddio may sink up to 100 mA total to  
its associated I/O pins and opamps. On the 68-pin and 100-pin  
devices each set of Vddio associated pins may sink up to  
100 mA. The 48-pin device may sink up to 100 mA total for all  
Vddio0 plus Vddio2 associated I/O pins and 100 mA total for all  
Vddio1 plus Vddio3 associated I/O pins.  
Power to all major functional blocks, including the programmable  
digital and analog peripherals, can be controlled independently  
by firmware. This allows low-power background processing  
when some peripherals are not in use. This, in turn, provides a  
total device current of only 1.2 mA when the CPU is running at  
6 MHz, or 0.8 mA running at 3 MHz.  
The details of the PSoC power modes are covered in the “Power  
System” section on page 28 of this data sheet. PSoC uses JTAG  
Figure 2-1. 48-pin SSOP Part Pinout  
(SIO) P12[2]  
(SIO) P12[3]  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
48 Vdda  
47 Vssa  
46 Vcca  
Lines show  
Vddio to I/O  
supply  
(OpAmp2out, GPIO) P0[0]  
(OpAmp0out, GPIO) P0[1]  
(OpAmp0+, GPIO) P0[2]  
(OpAmp0-/Extref0, GPIO) P0[3]  
Vddio0  
P15[3] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xi)  
45  
44 P15[2] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xo)  
43 P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)  
association  
P12[0] (SIO, I2C1: SCL)  
42  
(OpAmp2+, GPIO) P0[4]  
(OpAmp2-, GPIO) P0[5]  
41 Vddio3  
40 P15[1] (GPIO, MHz XTAL: Xi)  
39 P15[0] (GPIO, MHz XTAL: Xo)  
38 Vccd  
(IDAC0, GPIO) P0[6] 10  
(IDAC2, GPIO) P0[7] 11  
Vccd 12  
37 Vssd  
36 Vddd  
SSOP  
Vssd 13  
[6]  
Vddd  
P15[7] (USBIO, D-, SWDCK)  
P15[6] (USBIO, D+, SWDIO)  
14  
15  
35  
34  
[6]  
(GPIO) P2[3]  
(GPIO) P2[4] 16  
33 P1[7] (GPIO)  
Vddio2  
(GPIO) P2[5]  
(GPIO) P2[6]  
(GPIO) P2[7]  
Vssb  
P1[6] (GPIO)  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
Vddio1  
P1[5] (GPIO, nTRST)  
P1[4] (GPIO, TDI)  
P1[3] (GPIO, TDO, SWV)  
P1[2] (GPIO, configurable XRES)  
P1[1] (GPIO, TCK, SWDCK)  
Ind  
Vboost  
Vbat 24  
25 P1[0] (GPIO, TMS, SWDIO)  
Notes  
4. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 114 for details.  
5. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 5 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 2-2. 48-pin QFN Part Pinout[7]  
(GPIO) P2[6]  
(GPIO) P2[7]  
36  
1
2
P0[3] (OpAmp0-/Extref0, GPIO)  
35 P0[2] (OpAmp0+, GPIO)  
34 P0[1] (OpAmp0out, GPIO)  
33  
32  
31  
Lines show  
Vddio to I/O  
supply  
Vssb  
3
4
5
6
Ind  
Vboost  
P0[0] (OpAmp2out, GPIO)  
P12[3] (SIO)  
P12[2] (SIO)  
association  
Vbat  
QFN  
( Top View)  
(GPIO, TMS, SWDIO) P1[0]  
(GPIO, TCK, SWDCK) P1[1]  
30 Vdda  
29  
28  
27  
7
8
9
10  
Vssa  
Vcca  
(GPIO, Configurable XRES) P1[2]  
(GPIO, TDO, SWV) P1[3]  
P15[3] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xi)  
P15[2] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xo)  
P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)  
(GPIO, TDI) P1[4]  
26  
25  
11  
12  
(GPIO, nTRST) P1[5]  
Notes  
6. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.  
7. The center pad on the QFN package should be connected to digital ground (Vssd) for best mechanical, thermal, and electrical performance. If not connected to  
ground, it should be electrically floated and not connected to any other signal.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 6 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 2-3. 68-pin QFN Part Pinout[10]  
(GPIO) P2[6]  
(GPIO) P2[7]  
(I2C0: SCL, SIO) P12[4]  
P0[3] (GPIO, OpAmp0-/Extref0)  
P0[2] (GPIO, OpAmp0+)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
51  
50  
P0[1] (GPIO, OpAmp0out)  
P0[0] (GPIO, OpAmp2out)  
49  
48  
47  
Lines show Vddio  
to I/O supply  
association  
(I2C0: SDA, SIO) P12[5]  
Vssb  
Ind  
P12[3] (SIO)  
P12[2] (SIO)  
Vssd  
Vdda  
Vssa  
46  
45  
Vboost  
Vbat  
7
8
9
44  
43  
42  
41  
QFN  
(Top View)  
Vssd  
Vcca  
10  
XRES  
(TMS, SWDIO, GPIO) P1[0]  
(TCK, SWDCK, GPIO) P1[1]  
(configurable XRES, GPIO) P1[2]  
P15[3] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xi)  
P15[2] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xo)  
11  
12  
13  
40  
39  
P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)  
(TDO, SWV, GPIO) P1[3] 14  
38  
37  
36  
35  
P12[0] (SIO, 12C1: SCL)  
[9]  
(TDI, GPIO) P1[4]  
(nTRST, GPIO) P1[5]  
Vddio1  
15  
16  
17  
P3[7] (GPIO, OpAmp3out)  
[9]  
P3[6] (GPIO, OpAmp1out)  
Vddio3  
Notes  
8. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.  
9. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 114 for details.  
10. The center pad on the QFN package should be connected to digital ground (Vssd) for best mechanical, thermal, and electrical performance. If not connected to ground,  
it should be electrically floated and not connected to any other signal.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 7 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 2-4. 100-pin TQFP Part Pinout  
(GPIO) P2[5]  
(GPIO) P2[6]  
(GPIO) P2[7]  
Vddio0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
75  
74  
P0[3] (GPIO, OpAmp0-/Extref0)  
P0[2] (GPIO, OpAmp0+)  
73  
72  
71  
Lines show Vddio  
to I/O supply  
association  
(I2C0: SCL, SIO) P12[4]  
(I2C0: SDA, SIO) P12[5]  
(GPIO) P6[4]  
P0[1] (GPIO, OpAmp0out)  
P0[0] (GPIO, OpAmp2out)  
P4[1] (GPIO)  
P4[0] (GPIO)  
P12[3] (SIO)  
P12[2] (SIO)  
Vssd  
70  
69  
(GPIO) P6[5]  
(GPIO) P6[6]  
(GPIO) P6[7]  
7
8
9
68  
67  
10  
66  
65  
Vssb  
Ind  
Vboost  
Vbat  
Vdda  
Vssa  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
64  
63  
Vcca  
NC  
TQFP  
Vssd  
XRES  
(GPIO) P5[0]  
(GPIO) P5[1]  
62  
61  
60  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
(GPIO) P5[2]  
(GPIO) P5[3]  
(TMS, SWDIO, GPIO) P1[0]  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
NC  
P15[3] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xi)  
P15[2] (GPIO, kHz XTAL: Xo)  
(TCK, SWDCK, GPIO) P1[1]  
(configurable XRES, GPIO) P1[2]  
(TDO, SWV, GPIO) P1[3]  
P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)  
P12[0] (SIO, I2C1: SCL)  
P3[7] (GPIO, OpAmp3out)  
54  
53  
23  
[12]  
[12]  
52  
51  
(TDI, GPIO) P1[4]  
(nTRST, GPIO) P1[5]  
24  
25  
P3[6] (GPIO, OpAmp1out)  
Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 on page 10 show an example schematic and an example PCB layout, for the 100-pin TQFP part, for optimal  
analog performance on a two-layer board.  
„ The two pins labeled Vddd must be connected together.  
„ The two pins labeled Vccd must be connected together, with capacitance added, as shown in Figure 2-5 and Power System on  
page 28. The trace between the two Vccd pins should be as short as possible.  
„ The two pins labeled Vssd must be connected together.  
For information on circuit board layout issues for mixed signals, refer to the application note AN57821 - Mixed Signal Circuit Board  
Layout Considerations for PSoC® 3 and PSoC 5.  
Notes  
11. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.  
12. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 114 for details.  
13. The center pad on the QFN package should be connected to digital ground (Vssd) for best mechanical, thermal, and electrical performance. If not connected to ground,  
it should be electrically floated and not connected to any other signal.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 8 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 2-5. Example Schematic for 100-pin TQFP Part With Power Connections  
Vddd  
Vddd  
C1  
1 uF  
C2  
0.1 uF  
Vddd  
Vccd  
C6  
0.1 uF  
Vssd  
Vssd  
U2  
CY8C55xx  
Vssd  
Vdda  
Vddd  
75  
74  
73  
72  
71  
70  
69  
68  
67  
66  
65  
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
P2[5]  
P2[6]  
P2[7]  
P12[4], SIO  
P12[5], SIO  
P6[4]  
P6[5]  
P6[6]  
P6[7]  
Vssb  
Ind  
Vboost  
Vbat  
Vssd  
XRES  
P5[0]  
P5[1]  
P5[2]  
P5[3]  
P1[0], SWIO, TMS  
P1[1], SWDIO, TCK  
P1[2]  
P1[3], SWV, TDO  
P1[4], TDI  
P1[5], nTRST  
Vddio0  
OA0-, REF0, P0[3]  
C8  
0.1 uF  
C17  
1 uF  
OA0+, P0[2]  
OA0out, P0[1]  
OA2out, P0[0]  
P4[1]  
Vssd  
P4[0]  
Vssa  
Vdda  
SIO, P12[3]  
SIO, P12[2]  
Vssd  
Vssd  
Vssd  
Vdda  
Vssa  
Vcca  
Vdda  
Vssa  
Vcca  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
Vssd  
Vssd  
C9  
1 uF  
C10  
0.1 uF  
NC  
Vssa  
kHzXin, P15[3]  
kHzXout, P15[2]  
SIO, P12[1]  
SIO, P12[0]  
OA3out, P3[7]  
OA1out, P3[6]  
Vddd  
Vddd  
C11  
0.1 uF  
C12  
0.1 uF  
C13  
10 uF, 6.3 V 0.1 uF Vssd  
C14  
C15  
1 uF  
Vssd  
C16  
0.1 uF  
Vssa  
Vssa  
Vssd  
Note The two Vccd pins must be connected together with as short a trace as possible. A trace under the device is recommended, as  
shown in Figure 2-6 on page 10.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 9 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 2-6. Example PCB Layout for 100-pin TQFP Part for Optimal Analog Performance  
Vssa  
Vssd  
Vdda  
Vddd  
Vssa  
Plane  
Vssd  
Plane  
SIO. Special I/O provides interfaces to the CPU, digital  
peripherals and interrupts with a programmable high threshold  
voltage, analog comparator, high sink current, and high  
impedance state when the device is unpowered.  
3. Pin Descriptions  
IDAC0, IDAC1, IDAC2, IDAC3. Low resistance output pin for  
high current DACs (IDAC).  
OpAmp0out, OpAmp1out[15], OpAmp2out, OpAmp3out[15]  
High current output of uncommitted opamp.[14]  
.
SWDCK. Serial wire debug clock programming and debug port  
connection.  
SWDIO. Serial wire debug input and output programming and  
debug port connection.  
Extref0, Extref1. External reference input to the analog system.  
OpAmp0–, OpAmp1–[15], OpAmp2–, OpAmp3–[15]. Inverting  
SWV. Single wire viewer debug output.  
input to uncommitted opamp.  
TCK. JTAG test clock programming and debug port connection.  
TDI. JTAG test data in programming and debug port connection.  
OpAmp0+, OpAmp1+[15], OpAmp2+, OpAmp3+[15]  
.
Noninverting input to uncommitted opamp.  
TDO. JTAG test data out programming and debug port  
connection.  
GPIO. General purpose I/O pin provides interfaces to the CPU,  
digital peripherals, analog peripherals, interrupts, LCD segment  
drive, and CapSense.[14]  
TMS. JTAG test mode select programming and debug port  
connection.  
I2C0: SCL, I2C1: SCL. I2C SCL line providing wake from sleep  
on an address match. Any I/O pin can be used for I2C SCL if  
wake from sleep is not required.  
USBIO, D+. Provides D+ connection directly to a USB 2.0 bus.  
May be used as a digital I/O pin. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on  
devices without USB.  
I2C0: SDA, I2C1: SDA. I2C SDA line providing wake from sleep  
on an address match. Any I/O pin can be used for I2C SDA if  
wake from sleep is not required.  
USBIO, D–. Provides D– connection directly to a USB 2.0 bus.  
May be used as a digital I/O pin. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on  
devices without USB.  
Ind. Inductor connection to boost pump.  
Vboost. Power sense connection to boost pump.  
Vbat. Battery supply to boost pump.  
kHz XTAL: Xo, kHz XTAL: Xi. 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator pin.  
MHz XTAL: Xo, MHz XTAL: Xi. 4 to 25 MHz crystal oscillator pin.  
Vcca. Output of analog core regulator and input to analog core.  
Requires a 1-µF capacitor to Vssa. Regulator output not for  
external use.  
nTRST. Optional JTAG Test Reset programming and debug port  
connection to reset the JTAG connection.  
Notes  
14. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
15. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 114 for details.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 10 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Vccd. Output of digital core regulator and input to digital core.  
The two Vccd pins must be shorted together, with the trace  
between them as short as possible, and a 1-µF capacitor to  
Vssd; see Power System on page 28. Regulator output not for  
external use.  
4.2 Addressing Modes  
The following addressing modes are supported by the 8051:  
„ Direct addressing: The operand is specified by a direct 8-bit  
address field. Only the internal RAM and the SFRs can be  
accessed using this mode.  
Vdda. Supply for all analog peripherals and analog core  
regulator. Vdda must be the highest voltage present on the  
device. All other supply pins must be less than or equal to  
Vdda.  
„ Indirectaddressing:Theinstructionspecifiestheregisterwhich  
contains the address of the operand. The registers R0 or R1  
are used to specify the 8-bit address, while the data pointer  
(DPTR) register is used to specify the 16-bit address.  
Vddd. Supply for all digital peripherals and digital core regulator.  
VDDD must be less than or equal to Vdda.  
„ Register addressing: Certain instructions access one of the  
registers (R0 to R7) in the specified register bank. These  
instructions are more efficient because there is no need for an  
address field.  
Vssa. Ground for all analog peripherals.  
Vssb. Ground connection for boost pump.  
Vssd. Ground for all digital logic and I/O pins.  
„ Register specific instructions: Some instructions are specific to  
certain registers. For example, some instructions always act  
on the accumulator. In this case, there is no need to specify the  
operand.  
Vddio0, Vddio1, Vddio2, Vddio3. Supply for I/O pins. See  
pinouts for specific I/O pin to Vddio mapping. Each Vddio must  
be tied to a valid operating voltage (1.71 V to 5.5 V), and must  
be less than or equal to Vdda. If the I/O pins associated with  
Vddio0, Vddio2 or Vddio3 are not used then that Vddio should  
be tied to ground (Vssd or Vssa).  
„ Immediate constants: Some instructions carry the value of the  
constants directly instead of an address.  
„ Indexed addressing: This type of addressing can be used only  
for a read of the program memory. This mode uses the Data  
Pointer as the base and the accumulator value as an offset to  
read a program memory.  
XRES (and configurable XRES). External reset pin. Active low  
with internal pull-up. Pin P1[2] may be configured to be a XRES  
pin; see “Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs)” on page 21.  
„ Bit addressing: In this mode, the operand is one of 256 bits.  
4. CPU  
4.3 Instruction Set  
4.1 8051 CPU  
The 8051 instruction set is highly optimized for 8-bit handling and  
Boolean operations. The types of instructions supported include:  
The CY8C36 devices use a single cycle 8051 CPU, which is fully  
compatible with the original MCS-51 instruction set. The  
CY8C36 family uses a pipelined RISC architecture, which  
executes most instructions in 1 to 2 cycles to provide peak  
performance of up to 33 MIPS with an average of 2 cycles per  
instruction. The single cycle 8051 CPU runs ten times faster than  
a standard 8051 processor.  
„ Arithmetic instructions  
„ Logical instructions  
„ Data transfer instructions  
„ Boolean instructions  
The 8051 CPU subsystem includes these features:  
„ Program branching instructions  
„ Single cycle 8051 CPU  
4.3.1 Instruction Set Summary  
4.3.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions  
„ Up to 64 KB of flash memory, up to 2 KB of EEPROM, and up  
to 8 KB of SRAM  
Arithmetic instructions support the direct, indirect, register,  
immediate constant, and register-specific instructions.  
Arithmetic modes are used for addition, subtraction,  
„ Programmable nested vector interrupt controller  
„ DMA controller  
multiplication, division, increment, and decrement operations.  
Table 4-1 on page 12 lists the different arithmetic instructions.  
„ Peripheral HUB (PHUB)  
„ External memory interface (EMIF)  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 11 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 4-1. Arithmetic Instructions  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
ADD A,Rn  
Add register to accumulator  
Add direct byte to accumulator  
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
3
1
2
6
3
ADD A,Direct  
ADD A,@Ri  
ADD A,#data  
ADDC A,Rn  
Add indirect RAM to accumulator  
Add immediate data to accumulator  
Add register to accumulator with carry  
Add direct byte to accumulator with carry  
Add indirect RAM to accumulator with carry  
Add immediate data to accumulator with carry  
Subtract register from accumulator with borrow  
Subtract direct byte from accumulator with borrow  
Subtract indirect RAM from accumulator with borrow  
Subtract immediate data from accumulator with borrow  
Increment accumulator  
ADDC A,Direct  
ADDC A,@Ri  
ADDC A,#data  
SUBB A,Rn  
SUBB A,Direct  
SUBB A,@Ri  
SUBB A,#data  
INC  
A
INC Rn  
Increment register  
INC Direct  
INC @Ri  
Increment direct byte  
Increment indirect RAM  
DEC  
A
Decrement accumulator  
DEC Rn  
DEC Direct  
DEC @Ri  
INC DPTR  
MUL  
Decrement register  
Decrement direct byte  
Decrement indirect RAM  
Increment data pointer  
Multiply accumulator and B  
DIV  
Divide accumulator by B  
DAA  
Decimal adjust accumulator  
4.3.1.2 Logical Instructions  
The logical instructions perform Boolean operations such as AND, OR, XOR on bytes, rotate of accumulator contents, and swap of  
nibbles in an accumulator. The Boolean operations on the bytes are performed on the bit-by-bit basis. Table 4-2 on page 12 shows  
the list of logical instructions and their description.  
Table 4-2. Logical Instructions  
Mnemonic  
ANL A,Rn  
Description  
AND register to accumulator  
Bytes  
Cycles  
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
1
2
2
ANL A,Direct  
ANL A,@Ri  
AND direct byte to accumulator  
AND indirect RAM to accumulator  
AND immediate data to accumulator  
AND accumulator to direct byte  
AND immediate data to direct byte  
OR register to accumulator  
ANL A,#data  
ANL Direct, A  
ANL Direct, #data  
ORL A,Rn  
ORL A,Direct  
ORL A,@Ri  
OR direct byte to accumulator  
OR indirect RAM to accumulator  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 12 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 4-2. Logical Instructions (continued)  
Mnemonic  
Description  
OR immediate data to accumulator  
OR accumulator to direct byte  
Bytes  
Cycles  
ORL A,#data  
ORL Direct, A  
ORL Direct, #data  
XRL A,Rn  
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
OR immediate data to direct byte  
XOR register to accumulator  
XOR direct byte to accumulator  
XOR indirect RAM to accumulator  
XOR immediate data to accumulator  
XOR accumulator to direct byte  
XOR immediate data to direct byte  
Clear accumulator  
XRL A,Direct  
XRL A,@Ri  
XRL A,#data  
XRL Direct, A  
XRL Direct, #data  
CLR  
CPL  
RL  
A
A
A
A
A
Complement accumulator  
Rotate accumulator left  
RLC  
RR  
Rotate accumulator left through carry  
Rotate accumulator right  
RRC A  
SWAP A  
Rotate accumulator right though carry  
Swap nibbles within accumulator  
4.3.1.3 Data Transfer Instructions  
4.3.1.4 Boolean Instructions  
The data transfer instructions are of three types: the core RAM,  
xdata RAM, and the lookup tables. The core RAM transfer  
includes transfer between any two core RAM locations or SFRs.  
These instructions can use direct, indirect, register, and  
immediate addressing. The xdata RAM transfer includes only the  
transfer between the accumulator and the xdata RAM location.  
It can use only indirect addressing. The lookup tables involve  
nothing but the read of program memory using the Indexed  
addressing mode. Table 4-3 lists the various data transfer  
instructions available.  
The 8051 core has a separate bit-addressable memory location.  
It has 128 bits of bit addressable RAM and a set of SFRs that are  
bit addressable. The instruction set includes the whole menu of  
bit operations such as move, set, clear, toggle, OR, and AND  
instructions and the conditional jump instructions. Table 4-4 on  
page 14 lists the available Boolean instructions.  
Table 4-3. Data Transfer Instructions  
Mnemonic  
MOV A,Rn  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
Move register to accumulator  
Move direct byte to accumulator  
Move indirect RAM to accumulator  
Move immediate data to accumulator  
Move accumulator to register  
Move direct byte to register  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
1
1
2
2
2
1
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
MOV A,Direct  
MOV A,@Ri  
MOV A,#data  
MOV Rn,A  
MOV Rn,Direct  
MOV Rn, #data  
MOV Direct, A  
MOV Direct, Rn  
MOV Direct, Direct  
MOV Direct, @Ri  
MOV Direct, #data  
MOV @Ri, A  
Move immediate data to register  
Move accumulator to direct byte  
Move register to direct byte  
Move direct byte to direct byte  
Move indirect RAM to direct byte  
Move immediate data to direct byte  
Move accumulator to indirect RAM  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 13 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 4-3. Data Transfer Instructions (continued)  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
MOV @Ri, Direct  
MOV @Ri, #data  
MOV DPTR, #data16  
MOVC A, @A+DPTR  
MOVC A, @A + PC  
MOVX A,@Ri  
Move direct byte to indirect RAM  
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
3
2
3
5
4
4
3
5
4
3
2
2
3
3
3
Move immediate data to indirect RAM  
Load data pointer with 16 bit constant  
Move code byte relative to DPTR to accumulator  
Move code byte relative to PC to accumulator  
Move external RAM (8-bit) to accumulator  
Move external RAM (16-bit) to accumulator  
Move accumulator to external RAM (8-bit)  
Move accumulator to external RAM (16-bit)  
Push direct byte onto stack  
MOVX A, @DPTR  
MOVX @Ri, A  
MOVX @DPTR, A  
PUSH Direct  
POP Direct  
Pop direct byte from stack  
XCH A, Rn  
Exchange register with accumulator  
XCH A, Direct  
XCH A, @Ri  
Exchange direct byte with accumulator  
Exchange indirect RAM with accumulator  
Exchange low order indirect digit RAM with accumulator  
XCHD A, @Ri  
Table 4-4. Boolean Instructions  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
CLR  
C
Clear carry  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
CLR bit  
SETB C  
SETB bit  
Clear direct bit  
Set carry  
Set direct bit  
CPL  
C
Complement carry  
Complement direct bit  
AND direct bit to carry  
CPL bit  
ANL C, bit  
ANL C, /bit  
ORL C, bit  
ORL C, /bit  
MOV C, bit  
MOV bit, C  
AND complement of direct bit to carry  
OR direct bit to carry  
OR complement of direct bit to carry  
Move direct bit to carry  
Move carry to direct bit  
JC  
rel  
Jump if carry is set  
JNC rel  
Jump if no carry is set  
JB  
bit, rel  
Jump if direct bit is set  
JNB bit, rel  
JBC bit, rel  
Jump if direct bit is not set  
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 14 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
4.3.1.5 Program Branching Instructions  
The 8051 supports a set of conditional and unconditional jump instructions that help to modify the program execution flow. Table 4-5  
shows the list of jump instructions.  
Table 4-5. Jump Instructions  
Mnemonic  
ACALL addr11  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
Absolute subroutine call  
Long subroutine call  
Return from subroutine  
Return from interrupt  
Absolute jump  
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
1
4
4
4
4
3
4
3
5
4
4
5
4
4
5
4
5
1
LCALL addr16  
RET  
RETI  
AJMP addr11  
LJMP addr16  
SJMP rel  
Long jump  
Short jump (relative address)  
JMP @A + DPTR  
JZ rel  
Jump indirect relative to DPTR  
Jump if accumulator is zero  
JNZ rel  
Jump if accumulator is nonzero  
CJNE A,Direct, rel  
CJNE A, #data, rel  
CJNE Rn, #data, rel  
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel  
DJNZ Rn,rel  
DJNZ Direct, rel  
NOP  
Compare direct byte to accumulator and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate data to accumulator and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate data to register and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate data to indirect RAM and jump if not equal  
Decrement register and jump if not zero  
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero  
No operation  
„ Simultaneous CPU and DMA access to peripherals located on  
different spokes  
4.4 DMA and PHUB  
The PHUB and the DMA controller are responsible for data  
transfer between the CPU and peripherals, and also data  
transfers between peripherals. The PHUB and DMA also control  
device configuration during boot. The PHUB consists of:  
„ Simultaneous DMA source and destination burst transactions  
on different spokes  
„ Supports 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit addressing and data  
Table 4-6. PHUB Spokes and Peripherals  
„ A central hub that includes the DMA controller, arbiter, and  
router  
PHUB Spokes  
Peripherals  
„ Multiple spokes that radiate outward from the hub to most  
peripherals  
0
1
2
SRAM  
IOs, PICU, EMIF  
There are two PHUB masters: the CPU and the DMA controller.  
Both masters may initiate transactions on the bus. The DMA  
channels can handle peripheral communication without CPU  
intervention. The arbiter in the central hub determines which  
DMA channel is the highest priority if there are multiple requests.  
PHUB local configuration, Power manager,  
Clocks, IC, SWV, EEPROM, Flash  
programming interface  
3
4
5
6
7
Analog interface and trim, Decimator  
USB, CAN, I2C, Timers, Counters, and PWMs  
4.4.1 PHUB Features  
DFB  
„ CPU and DMA controller are both bus masters to the PHUB  
UDBs group 1  
UDBs group 2  
„ Eight Multi-layer AHB Bus parallel access paths (spokes) for  
peripheral access  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 15 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
4.4.2 DMA Features  
Table 4-7. Priority Levels  
„ 24 DMA channels  
Priority Level  
% Bus Bandwidth  
„ Each channel has one or more transaction descriptors (TD) to  
configure channel behavior. Up to 128 total TDs can be defined  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
100.0  
100.0  
50.0  
25.0  
12.5  
6.2  
„ TDs can be dynamically updated  
„ Eight levels of priority per channel  
„ Anydigitallyroutablesignal, theCPU, oranotherDMAchannel,  
can trigger a transaction  
„ Each channel can generate up to two interrupts per transfer  
„ Transactions can be stalled or canceled  
3.1  
1.5  
„ Supports transaction size of infinite or 1 to 64 KB  
„ TDs may be nested and/or chained for complex transactions  
When the fairness algorithm is disabled, DMA access is granted  
based solely on the priority level; no bus bandwidth guarantees  
are made.  
4.4.3 Priority Levels  
The CPU always has higher priority than the DMA controller  
when their accesses require the same bus resources. Due to the  
system architecture, the CPU can never starve the DMA. DMA  
channels of higher priority (lower priority number) may interrupt  
current DMA transfers. In the case of an interrupt, the current  
transfer is allowed to complete its current transaction. To ensure  
latency limits when multiple DMA accesses are requested  
simultaneously, a fairness algorithm guarantees an interleaved  
minimum percentage of bus bandwidth for priority levels 2  
through 7. Priority levels 0 and 1 do not take part in the fairness  
algorithm and may use 100% of the bus bandwidth. If a tie occurs  
on two DMA requests of the same priority level, a simple round  
robin method is used to evenly share the allocated bandwidth.  
The round robin allocation can be disabled for each DMA  
channel, allowing it to always be at the head of the line. Priority  
levels 2 to 7 are guaranteed the minimum bus bandwidth shown  
in Table 4-7 after the CPU and DMA priority levels 0 and 1 have  
satisfied their requirements.  
4.4.4 Transaction Modes Supported  
The flexible configuration of each DMA channel and the ability to  
chain multiple channels allow the creation of both simple and  
complex use cases. General use cases include, but are not  
limited to:  
4.4.4.1 Simple DMA  
In a simple DMA case, a single TD transfers data between a  
source and sink (peripherals or memory location). The basic  
timing diagrams of DMA read and write cycles shown in  
Figure 4-1. For more description on other transfer modes, refer  
to the Technical Reference Manual.  
Figure 4-1. DMA Timing Diagram  
ADDRESS Phase  
DATA Phase  
ADDRESS Phase  
DATA Phase  
CLK  
CLK  
ADDR 16/32  
WRITE  
ADDR 16/32  
A
B
A
B
WRITE  
DATA  
DATA (A)  
DATA (A)  
DATA  
READY  
READY  
Basic DMA Read Transfer without wait states  
Basic DMA Write Transfer without wait states  
4.4.4.2 Auto Repeat DMA  
data previously received in the other buffer. In its simplest form,  
this is done by chaining two TDs together so that each TD calls  
the opposite TD when complete.  
Auto repeat DMA is typically used when a static pattern is  
repetitively read from system memory and written to a peripheral.  
This is done with a single TD that chains to itself.  
4.4.4.4 Circular DMA  
4.4.4.3 Ping Pong DMA  
Circular DMA is similar to ping pong DMA except it contains more  
than two buffers. In this case there are multiple TDs; after the last  
TD is complete it chains back to the first TD.  
A ping pong DMA case uses double buffering to allow one buffer  
to be filled by one client while another client is consuming the  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 16 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
4.4.4.5 Scatter Gather DMA  
4.5 Interrupt Controller  
In the case of scatter gather DMA, there are multiple  
The interrupt controller provides a mechanism for hardware  
resources to change program execution to a new address,  
independent of the current task being executed by the main  
code. The interrupt controller provides enhanced features not  
found on original 8051 interrupt controllers:  
noncontiguous sources or destinations that are required to  
effectively carry out an overall DMA transaction. For example, a  
packet may need to be transmitted off of the device and the  
packet elements, including the header, payload, and trailer, exist  
in various noncontiguous locations in memory. Scatter gather  
DMA allows the segments to be concatenated together by using  
multiple TDs in a chain. The chain gathers the data from the  
multiple locations. A similar concept applies for the reception of  
data onto the device. Certain parts of the received data may need  
to be scattered to various locations in memory for software  
processing convenience. Each TD in the chain specifies the  
location for each discrete element in the chain.  
„ Thirty-two interrupt vectors  
„ Jumps directly to ISR anywhere in code space with dynamic  
vector addresses  
„ Multiple sources for each vector  
„ Flexible interrupt to vector matching  
„ Each interrupt vector is independently enabled or disabled  
4.4.4.6 Packet Queuing DMA  
„ Each interrupt can be dynamically assigned one of eight  
priorities  
Packet queuing DMA is similar to scatter gather DMA but  
specifically refers to packet protocols. With these protocols,  
there may be separate configuration, data, and status phases  
associated with sending or receiving a packet.  
„ Eight level nestable interrupts  
„ Multiple I/O interrupt vectors  
„ Software can send interrupts  
„ Software can clear pending interrupts  
For instance, to transmit a packet, a memory mapped  
configuration register can be written inside a peripheral,  
specifying the overall length of the ensuing data phase. The CPU  
can set up this configuration information anywhere in system  
memory and copy it with a simple TD to the peripheral. After the  
configuration phase, a data phase TD (or a series of data phase  
TDs) can begin (potentially using scatter gather). When the data  
phase TD(s) finish, a status phase TD can be invoked that reads  
some memory mapped status information from the peripheral  
and copies it to a location in system memory specified by the  
CPU for later inspection. Multiple sets of configuration, data, and  
status phase “subchains” can be strung together to create larger  
chains that transmit multiple packets in this way. A similar  
concept exists in the opposite direction to receive the packets.  
When an interrupt is pending, the current instruction is  
completed and the program counter is pushed onto the stack.  
Code execution then jumps to the program address provided by  
the vector. After the ISR is completed, a RETI instruction is  
executed and returns execution to the instruction following the  
previously interrupted instruction. To do this the RETI instruction  
pops the program counter from the stack.  
If the same priority level is assigned to two or more interrupts,  
the interrupt with the lower vector number is executed first. Each  
interrupt vector may choose from three interrupt sources: Fixed  
Function, DMA, and UDB. The fixed function interrupts are direct  
connections to the most common interrupt sources and provide  
the lowest resource cost connection. The DMA interrupt sources  
provide direct connections to the two DMA interrupt sources  
provided per DMA channel. The third interrupt source for vectors  
is from the UDB digital routing array. This allows any digital signal  
available to the UDB array to be used as an interrupt source.  
Fixed function interrupts and all interrupt sources may be routed  
to any interrupt vector using the UDB interrupt source  
connections.  
4.4.4.7 Nested DMA  
One TD may modify another TD, as the TD configuration space  
is memory mapped similar to any other peripheral. For example,  
a first TD loads a second TD’s configuration and then calls the  
second TD. The second TD moves data as required by the  
application. When complete, the second TD calls the first TD,  
which again updates the second TD’s configuration. This  
process repeats as often as necessary.  
Figure 4-2 on page 18 represents typical flow of events when an  
interrupt triggered. Figure 4-3 on page 19 shows the interrupt  
structure and priority polling.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 17 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 4-2. Interrupt Processing Timing Diagram  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
S
CLK  
Arrival of new Interrupt  
INT_INPUT  
PEND  
S
S
S
Pend bit is set on next system clock active edge  
Interrupt is posted to ascertain the priority  
POST and PEND bits cleared after IRQ is sleared  
POST  
IRQ  
IRQ cleared after receiving IRA  
Interrupt request sent to core for processing  
S
S
The active interrupt  
number is posted to core  
ACTIVE_INT_NUM  
(#10)  
0x0000  
NA  
NA  
0x0010  
S
S
The active interrupt ISR  
address is posted to core  
NA  
INT_VECT_ADDR  
S
S
S
IRA  
IRC  
Int. State  
Clear  
Interrupt generation and posting to CPU  
CPU Response  
Completing current instruction and branching to vector address  
Complete ISR and return  
TIME  
Notes  
1: Interrupt triggered asynchronous to the clock  
2: The PEND bit is set on next active clock edge to indicate the interrupt arrival  
3: POST bit is set following the PEND bit  
4: Interrupt request and the interrupt number sent to CPU core after evaluation priority (Takes 3 clocks)  
5: ISR address is posted to CPU core for branching  
6: CPU acknowledges the interrupt request  
7: ISR address is read by CPU for branching  
8, 9: PEND and POST bits are cleared respectively after receiving the IRA from core  
10: IRA bit is cleared after completing the current instruction and starting the instruction execution from ISR location (Takes 7 cycles)  
11: IRC is set to indicate the completion of ISR, Active int. status is restored with previous status  
The total interrupt latency (ISR execution)  
= POST + PEND + IRQ + IRA + Completing current instruction and branching  
= 1+1+1+2+7 cycles  
= 12 cycles  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 18 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 4-3. Interrupt Structure  
Interrupt Polling logic  
Interrupts form Fixed  
function blocks, DMA and  
UDBs  
Highest Priority  
Interrupt Enable/  
Disable, PEND and  
POST logic  
Interrupts 0 to 30  
from UDBs  
0
Interrupts 0 to 30  
from Fixed  
1
Function Blocks  
IRQ  
0 to 30  
ACTIVE_INT_NUM  
INT_VECT_ADDR  
Individual  
Enable Disable  
bits  
8 Level  
Priority  
decoder  
for all  
Interrupt  
routing logic  
to select 31  
sources  
Interrupts 0 to  
30 from DMA  
[15:0]  
interrupts  
IRA  
IRC  
30  
Global Enable  
disable bit  
Lowest Priority  
Table 4-8. Interrupt Vector Table  
#
Fixed Function  
DMA  
UDB  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LVD  
ECC  
Reserved  
Sleep (Pwr Mgr)  
PICU[0]  
PICU[1]  
PICU[2]  
PICU[3]  
PICU[4]  
PICU[5]  
PICU[6]  
PICU[12]  
PICU[15]  
Comparators Combined  
Switched Caps Combined  
I2C  
phub_termout0[0]  
phub_termout0[1]  
phub_termout0[2]  
phub_termout0[3]  
phub_termout0[4]  
phub_termout0[5]  
phub_termout0[6]  
phub_termout0[7]  
phub_termout0[8]  
phub_termout0[9]  
phub_termout0[10]  
phub_termout0[11]  
phub_termout0[12]  
phub_termout0[13]  
phub_termout0[14]  
phub_termout0[15]  
phub_termout1[0]  
phub_termout1[1]  
phub_termout1[2]  
phub_termout1[3]  
phub_termout1[4]  
phub_termout1[5]  
udb_intr[0]  
udb_intr[1]  
udb_intr[2]  
udb_intr[3]  
udb_intr[4]  
udb_intr[5]  
udb_intr[6]  
udb_intr[7]  
udb_intr[8]  
udb_intr[9]  
udb_intr[10]  
udb_intr[11]  
udb_intr[12]  
udb_intr[13]  
udb_intr[14]  
udb_intr[15]  
udb_intr[16]  
udb_intr[17]  
udb_intr[18]  
udb_intr[19]  
udb_intr[20]  
udb_intr[21]  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
CAN  
Timer/Counter0  
Timer/Counter1  
Timer/Counter2  
Timer/Counter3  
USB SOF Int  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 19 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 4-8. Interrupt Vector Table (continued)  
Fixed Function  
#
DMA  
UDB  
udb_intr[22]  
udb_intr[23]  
udb_intr[24]  
udb_intr[25]  
udb_intr[26]  
udb_intr[27]  
udb_intr[28]  
udb_intr[29]  
udb_intr[30]  
udb_intr[31]  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
USB Arb Int  
USB Bus Int  
USB Endpoint[0]  
USB Endpoint Data  
Reserved  
LCD  
DFB Int  
Decimator Int  
PHUB Error Int  
EEPROM Fault Int  
phub_termout1[6]  
phub_termout1[7]  
phub_termout1[8]  
phub_termout1[9]  
phub_termout1[10]  
phub_termout1[11]  
phub_termout1[12]  
phub_termout1[13]  
phub_termout1[14]  
phub_termout1[15]  
The device offers the ability to assign one of four protection  
levels to each row of flash. Table 5-1 lists the protection modes  
available. Flash protection levels can only be changed by  
performing a complete flash erase. The Full Protection and Field  
Upgrade settings disable external access (through a debugging  
tool such as PSoC Creator, for example). If your application  
requires code update through a boot loader, then use the Field  
Upgrade setting. Use the Unprotected setting only when no  
security is needed in your application. The PSoC device also  
offers an advanced security feature called Device Security that  
permanently disables all test, programming, and debug ports,  
protecting your application from external access (see Device  
Security on page 62). For information about how to take full  
advantage of the security features in PSoC, see the PSoC 3  
TRM.  
5. Memory  
5.1 Static RAM  
CY8C36 Static RAM (SRAM) is used for temporary data storage.  
Up to 8 KB of SRAM is provided and can be accessed by the  
8051 or the DMA controller. See Memory Map on page 22.  
Simultaneous access of SRAM by the 8051 and the DMA  
controller is possible if different 4-KB blocks are accessed.  
5.2 Flash Program Memory  
Flash memory in PSoC devices provides nonvolatile storage for  
user firmware, user configuration data, bulk data storage, and  
optional ECC data. The main flash memory area contains up to  
64 KB of user program space.  
Table 5-1. Flash Protection  
Protection  
Up to an additional 8 KB of flash space is available for ECC. If  
ECC is not used this space can store device configuration data  
and bulk user data. User code may not be run out of the ECC  
flash memory section. ECC can correct one bit error and detect  
two bit errors per 8 bytes of firmware memory; an interrupt can  
be generated when an error is detected.  
Allowed  
Not Allowed  
Setting  
Unprotected  
External read and write  
+ internal read and write  
Factory  
Upgrade  
External write + internal External read  
read and write  
Flash is read in units of rows; each row is 9 bytes wide with 8  
bytes of data and 1 byte of ECC data. When a row is read, the  
data bytes are copied into an 8-byte instruction buffer. The CPU  
fetches its instructions from this buffer, for improved CPU  
performance.  
Field Upgrade Internal read and write External read and  
write  
Full Protection Internal read  
External read and  
write + internal write  
Flash programming is performed through a special interface and  
preempts code execution out of flash. The flash programming  
interface performs flash erasing, programming and setting code  
protection levels. Flash in-system serial programming (ISSP),  
typically used for production programming, is possible through  
both the SWD and JTAG interfaces. In-system programming,  
typically used for bootloaders, is also possible using serial  
interfaces such as I2C, USB, UART, and SPI, or any  
communications protocol.  
Disclaimer  
Note the following details of the flash code protection features on  
Cypress devices.  
Cypress products meet the specifications contained in their  
particular Cypress data sheets. Cypress believes that its family  
of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the  
market today, regardless of how they are used. There may be  
methods, unknown to Cypress, that can breach the code  
protection features. Any of these methods, to our knowledge,  
would be dishonest and possibly illegal. Neither Cypress nor any  
other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of  
their code. Code protection does not mean that we are  
guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”  
5.3 Flash Security  
All PSoC devices include a flexible flash-protection model that  
prevents access and visibility to on-chip flash memory. This  
prevents duplication or reverse engineering of proprietary code.  
Flash memory is organized in blocks, where each block contains  
256 bytes of program or data and 32 bytes of ECC or  
configuration data. A total of up to 256 blocks is provided on  
64-KB flash devices.  
Cypress is willing to work with the customer who is concerned  
about the integrity of their code. Code protection is constantly  
evolving. We at Cypress are committed to continuously  
improving the code protection features of our products.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 20 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
5.4 EEPROM  
PSoC EEPROM memory is a byte-addressable nonvolatile memory. The CY8C36 has up to 2 KB of EEPROM memory to store user  
data. Reads from EEPROM are random access at the byte level. Reads are done directly; writes are done by sending write commands  
to an EEPROM programming interface. CPU code execution can continue from flash during EEPROM writes. EEPROM is erasable  
and writeable at the row level. The EEPROM is divided into 128 rows of 16 bytes each.  
The CPU can not execute out of EEPROM. There is no ECC hardware associated with EEPROM. If ECC is required it must be handled  
in firmware.  
5.5 Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs)  
PSoC has a 4-byte array of nonvolatile latches (NVLs) that are used to configure the device at reset. The NVL register map is shown  
in Table 5-2.  
Table 5-2. Device Configuration NVL Register Map  
Register Address  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
PRT3RDM[1:0]  
PRT12RDM[1:0]  
PRT2RDM[1:0]  
PRT6RDM[1:0]  
PRT1RDM[1:0]  
PRT5RDM[1:0]  
PRT0RDM[1:0]  
PRT4RDM[1:0]  
PRT15RDM[1:0]  
XRESMEN  
DIG_PHS_DLY[3:0]  
ECCEN  
DPS[1:0]  
CFGSPEED  
The details for individual fields and their factory default settings are shown in Table 5-3:.  
Table 5-3. Fields and Factory Default Settings  
Field  
Description  
Settings  
PRTxRDM[1:0]  
Controls reset drive mode of the corresponding IO port. 00b (default) - high impedance analog  
See “Reset Configuration” on page 38. All pins of the port 01b - high impedance digital  
are set to the same mode.  
10b - resistive pull up  
11b - resistive pull down  
XRESMEN  
CFGSPEED  
DPS{1:0]  
Controls whether pin P1[2] is used as a GPIO or as an  
external reset. See “Pin Descriptions” on page 10, XRES 1 (default for 48-pin parts) - external reset  
description.  
0 (default for 68-pin and 100-pin parts) - GPIO  
Controls the speed of the IMO-based clock during the  
device boot process, for faster boot or low-power  
operation  
0 (default) - 12 MHz IMO  
1 - 48 MHz IMO  
Controls the usage of various P1 pins as a debug port. 00b - 5-wire JTAG  
See “Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources” on  
page 59.  
01b (default) - 4-wire JTAG  
10b - SWD  
11b - debug ports disabled  
ECCEN  
Controls whether ECC flash is used for ECC or for general 0 (default) - ECC disabled  
configuration and data storage. See “Flash Program  
Memory” on page 20.  
1 - ECC enabled  
DIG_PHS_DLY[3:0]  
Selects the digital clock phase delay.  
See the TRM for details.  
Although PSoC Creator provides support for modifying the device configuration NVLs, the number of NVL erase / write cycles is limited  
– see “Nonvolatile Latches (NVL))” on page 102.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 21 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 5-1 is the EMIF block diagram. The EMIF supports  
synchronous and asynchronous memories. The CY8C36  
supports only one type of external memory device at a time.  
5.6 External Memory Interface  
CY8C36 provides an external memory interface (EMIF) for  
connecting to external memory devices. The connection allows  
read and write accesses to external memories. The EMIF  
operates in conjunction with UDBs, I/O ports, and other  
hardware to generate external memory address and control  
signals. At 33 MHz, each memory access cycle takes four bus  
clock cycles.  
External memory can be accessed through the 8051 xdata  
space; up to 24 address bits can be used. See xdata Space on  
page 24. The memory can be 8 or 16 bits wide.  
Figure 5-1. EMIF Block Diagram  
External_MEM_ ADDR[23:0]  
External_MEM_DATA[15:0]  
Address Signals  
IO  
PORTs  
Data,  
Address,  
and Control  
Signals  
Data Signals  
IO IF  
IO  
PORTs  
Control Signals  
Control  
IO  
PORTs  
PHUB  
Data,  
Address,  
and Control  
Signals  
DSI Dynamic Output  
Control  
UDB  
DSI to Port  
Other  
EM Control  
Signals  
Control  
Signals  
Data,  
Address,  
and Control  
Signals  
EMIF  
5.7.2 Internal Data Space  
5.7 Memory Map  
The CY8C36 8051 internal data space is 384 bytes, compressed  
within a 256-byte space. This space consists of 256 bytes of  
RAM (in addition to the SRAM mentioned in “Static RAM” on  
page 20) and a 128-byte space for Special Function Registers  
(SFRs). See Figure 5-2. The lowest 32 bytes are used for four  
banks of registers R0-R7. The next 16 bytes are bit-addressable.  
The CY8C36 8051 memory map is very similar to the MCS-51  
memory map.  
5.7.1 Code Space  
The CY8C36 8051 code space is 64 KB. Only main flash exists  
in this space. See the “Flash Program Memory” section on  
page 20.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 22 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 5-2. 8051 Internal Data Space  
In addition to the register or bit address modes used with the  
lower 48 bytes, the lower 128 bytes can be accessed with direct  
or indirect addressing. With direct addressing mode, the upper  
128 bytes map to the SFRs. With indirect addressing mode, the  
upper 128 bytes map to RAM. Stack operations use indirect  
addressing; the 8051 stack space is 256 bytes. See the  
“Addressing Modes” section on page 11.  
0x00  
4 Banks, R0-R7 Each  
0x1F  
0x20  
0x2F  
0x30  
Bit-Addressable Area  
Lower Core RAM Shared with Stack Space  
(direct and indirect addressing)  
0x7F  
0x80  
SFR  
Upper Core RAM Shared  
with Stack Space  
(indirect addressing)  
Special Function Registers  
(direct addressing)  
0xFF  
5.7.3 SFRs  
The special function register (SFR) space provides access to frequently accessed registers. The memory map for the SFR memory  
space is shown in Table 5-4.  
Table 5-4. SFR Map  
Address  
0×F8 SFRPRT15DR  
0×F0  
0/8  
1/9  
2/A  
SFRPRT15SEL  
SFRPRT12SEL  
MXAX  
3/B  
4/C  
5/D  
6/E  
7/F  
SFRPRT15PS  
B
0×E8 SFRPRT12DR  
0×E0 ACC  
SFRPRT12PS  
0×D8 SFRPRT6DR  
0×D0 PSW  
SFRPRT6PS  
SFRPRT6SEL  
0×C8 SFRPRT5DR  
0×C0 SFRPRT4DR  
SFRPRT5PS  
SFRPRT5SEL  
SFRPRT4SEL  
SFRPRT4PS  
0×B8  
0×B0 SFRPRT3DR  
0×A8 IE  
SFRPRT3PS  
SFRPRT3SEL  
0×A0 P2AX  
SFRPRT1SEL  
SFRPRT2SEL  
0×98 SFRPRT2DR  
0×90 SFRPRT1DR  
SFRPRT2PS  
SFRPRT1PS  
SFRPRT0PS  
SP  
DPX0  
DPX1  
0×88  
SFRPRT0SEL  
DPL0  
0×80 SFRPRT0DR  
DPH0  
DPL1  
DPH1  
DPS  
The CY8C36 family provides the standard set of registers found  
on industry standard 8051 devices. In addition, the CY8C36  
devices add SFRs to provide direct access to the I/O ports on the  
device. The following sections describe the SFRs added to the  
CY8C36 family.  
„ JMP @A+DPTR  
„ INC DPTR  
„ MOV DPTR, #data16  
The extended data pointer SFRs, DPX0, DPX1, MXAX, and  
P2AX, hold the most significant parts of memory addresses  
during access to the xdata space. These SFRs are used only  
with the MOVX instructions.  
XData Space Access SFRs  
The 8051 core features dual DPTR registers for faster data  
transfer operations. The data pointer select SFR, DPS, selects  
which data pointer register, DPTR0 or DPTR1, is used for the  
following instructions:  
During a MOVX instruction using the DPTR0/DPTR1 register,  
the most significant byte of the address is always equal to the  
contents of DPX0/DPX1.  
„ MOVX @DPTR, A  
„ MOVX A, @DPTR  
„ MOVC A, @A+DPTR  
During a MOVX instruction using the R0 or R1 register, the most  
significant byte of the address is always equal to the contents of  
MXAX, and the next most significant byte is always equal to the  
contents of P2AX.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 23 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
I/O Port SFRs  
Table 5-5. XDATA Data Address Map  
The I/O ports provide digital input sensing, output drive, pin  
interrupts, connectivity for analog inputs and outputs, LCD, and  
access to peripherals through the DSI. Full information on I/O  
ports is found in I/O System and Routing on page 32.  
Address Range  
0×00 0000 – 0×00 1FFF  
0×00 4000 – 0×00 42FF  
0×00 4300 – 0×00 43FF  
0×00 4400 – 0×00 44FF  
0×00 4500 – 0×00 45FF  
0×00 4700 – 0×00 47FF  
0×00 4900 – 0×00 49FF  
0×00 4E00 – 0×00 4EFF  
0×00 4F00 – 0×00 4FFF  
0×00 5000 – 0×00 51FF  
0×00 5400 – 0×00 54FF  
Purpose  
SRAM  
Clocking, PLLs, and oscillators  
Power management  
Interrupt controller  
I/O ports are linked to the CPU through the PHUB and are also  
available in the SFRs. Using the SFRs allows faster access to a  
limited set of I/O port registers, while using the PHUB allows boot  
configuration and access to all I/O port registers.  
Ports interrupt control  
Flash programming interface  
I2C controller  
Each SFR supported I/O port provides three SFRs:  
„ SFRPRTxDR sets the output data state of the port (where × is  
port number and includes ports 0–6, 12 and 15).  
Decimator  
Fixed timer/counter/PWMs  
I/O ports control  
„ The SFRPRTxSEL selects whether the PHUB PRTxDR  
register or the SFRPRTxDR controls each pin’s output buffer  
within the port. If a SFRPRTxSEL[y] bit is high, the  
corresponding SFRPRTxDR[y] bit sets the output state for that  
pin. If a SFRPRTxSEL[y] bit is low, the corresponding  
PRTxDR[y] bit sets the output state of the pin (where y varies  
from 0 to 7).  
External Memory Interface  
(EMIF) control registers  
0×00 5800 – 0×00 5FFF  
0×00 6000 – 0×00 60FF  
0×00 6400 – 0×00 6FFF  
0×00 7000 – 0×00 7FFF  
0×00 8000 – 0×00 8FFF  
0×00 A000 – 0×00 A400  
0×00 C000 – 0×00 C800  
0×01 0000 – 0×01 FFFF  
Analog Subsystem interface  
USB controller  
„ The SFRPRTxPS is a read only register that contains pin state  
values of the port pins.  
UDB configuration  
PHUB configuration  
EEPROM  
5.7.3.1 xdata Space  
The 8051 xdata space is 24-bit, or 16 MB in size. The majority of  
this space is not “external”—it is used by on-chip components.  
See Table 5-5. External, that is, off-chip, memory can be  
accessed using the EMIF. See External Memory Interface on  
page 22.  
CAN  
Digital Filter Block  
Digital Interconnect  
configuration  
0×05 0220 – 0×05 02F0  
0×08 0000 – 0×08 1FFF  
0×80 0000 – 0×FF FFFF  
Debug controller  
flash ECC bytes  
External Memory Interface  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 24 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Key features of the clocking system include:  
6. System Integration  
„ Seven general purpose clock sources  
‡ 3- to 62-MHz IMO, ±1% at 3 MHz  
‡ 4- to 25-MHz external crystal oscillator (MHzECO)  
‡ Clock doubler provides a doubled clock frequency output for  
the USB block, see USB Clock Domain on page 28.  
‡ DSI signal from an external I/O pin or other logic  
‡ 24- to 67-MHz fractional PLL sourced from IMO, MHzECO,  
or DSI  
6.1 Clocking System  
The clocking system generates, divides, and distributes clocks  
throughout the PSoC system. For the majority of systems, no  
external crystal is required. The IMO and PLL together can  
generate up to a 66 MHz clock, accurate to ±1% over voltage and  
temperature. Additional internal and external clock sources allow  
each design to optimize accuracy, power, and cost. All of the  
system clock sources can be used to generate other clock  
frequencies in the 16-bit clock dividers and UDBs for anything  
the user wants, for example a UART baud rate generator.  
‡ 1-kHz, 33-kHz, 100-kHz ILO for WDT and sleep timer  
‡ 32.768-kHz external crystal oscillator (kHzECO) for RTC  
„ IMO has a USB mode that auto locks to the USB bus clock  
requiring no external crystal for USB. (USB equipped parts only)  
Clock generation and distribution is automatically configured  
through the PSoC Creator IDE graphical interface. This is based  
on the complete system’s requirements. It greatly speeds the  
design process. PSoC Creator allows you to build clocking  
systems with minimal input. You can specify desired clock  
frequencies and accuracies, and the software locates or builds a  
clock that meets the required specifications. This is possible  
because of the programmability inherent PSoC.  
„ Independently sourced clock in all clock dividers  
„ Eight 16-bit clock dividers for the digital system  
„ Four 16-bit clock dividers for the analog system  
„ Dedicated 16-bit divider for the bus clock  
„ Dedicated 4-bit divider for the CPU clock  
„ Automatic clock configuration in PSoC Creator  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 25 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 6-1. Clocking Subsystem  
External IO  
or DSI  
0-66 MHz  
3-62 MHz  
IMO  
4-25 MHz  
ECO  
1,33,100 kHz  
ILO  
32 kHz ECO  
CPU  
Clock  
CPU Clock Divider  
4 bit  
48 MHz  
Doubler for  
USB  
24-67 MHz  
PLL  
System  
Clock Mux  
Bus  
Clock  
Bus Clock Divider  
16 bit  
s
k
e
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
w
s
k
e
w
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
7
s
k
e
w
7
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
s
k
e
w
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Table 6-1. Oscillator Summary  
Source  
IMO  
Fmin  
3 MHz  
4 MHz  
Tolerance at Fmin  
±1% over voltage and temperature  
Crystal dependent  
Fmax  
62 MHz  
25 MHz  
Tolerance at Fmax  
±7%  
Startup Time  
10 µs max  
MHzECO  
Crystal dependent  
5 ms typ, max is  
crystal dependent  
DSI  
PLL  
0 MHz  
Input dependent  
66 MHz  
67 MHz  
48 MHz  
100 kHz  
Input dependent  
Input dependent  
Input dependent  
–55%, +100%  
Input dependent  
250 µs max  
1 µs max  
24 MHz Input dependent  
48 MHz Input dependent  
Doubler  
ILO  
1 kHz  
–50%, +100%  
15 ms max in lowest  
power mode  
kHzECO  
32 kHz  
Crystal dependent  
32 kHz  
Crystal dependent  
500 ms typ, max is  
crystal dependent  
6.1.1 Internal Oscillators  
6.1.1.2 Clock Doubler  
The clock doubler outputs a clock at twice the frequency of the  
input clock. The doubler worksat input frequency of 24 MHz,  
providing 48 MHz for the USB. It can be configured to use a clock  
from the IMO, MHzECO, or the DSI (external pin).  
6.1.1.1 Internal Main Oscillator  
In most designs the IMO is the only clock source required, due  
to its ±1% accuracy. The IMO operates with no external  
components and outputs a stable clock. A factory trim for each  
frequency range is stored in the device. With the factory trim,  
tolerance varies from ±1% at 3 MHz, up to ±7% at 62 MHz. The  
IMO, in conjunction with the PLL, allows generation of CPU and  
system clocks up to the device's maximum frequency (see  
Phase-Locked Loop).  
6.1.1.3 Phase-Locked Loop  
The PLL allows low frequency, high accuracy clocks to be  
multiplied to higher frequencies. This is a tradeoff between  
higher clock frequency and accuracy and, higher power  
consumption and increased startup time.  
The IMO provides clock outputs at 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 62 MHz.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 26 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
The PLL block provides a mechanism for generating clock  
frequencies based upon a variety of input sources. The PLL  
outputs clock frequencies in the range of 24 to 67 MHz. Its input  
and feedback dividers supply 4032 discrete ratios to create  
almost any desired system clock frequency. The accuracy of the  
PLL output depends on the accuracy of the PLL input source.  
The most common PLL use is to multiply the IMO clock at 3 MHz,  
where it is most accurate, to generate the CPU and system  
clocks up to the device’s maximum frequency.  
Figure 6-2. MHzECO Block Diagram  
XCLK_MHZ  
4 25 MHz  
Crystal Osc  
The PLL achieves phase lock within 250 µs (verified by bit  
setting). It can be configured to use a clock from the IMO,  
MHzECO or DSI (external pin). The PLL clock source can be  
used until lock is complete and signaled with a lock bit. The lock  
signal can be routed through the DSI to generate an interrupt.  
Disable the PLL before entering low-power modes.  
Xo  
(Pin P15[0])  
Xi  
(Pin P15[1])  
4 – 25 MHz  
crystal  
External  
Components  
Capacitors  
6.1.1.4 Internal Low-Speed Oscillator  
The ILO provides clock frequencies for low-power consumption,  
including the watchdog timer, and sleep timer. The ILO  
generates up to three different clocks: 1 kHz, 33 kHz, and  
100 kHz.  
6.1.2.2 32.768-kHz ECO  
The 32.768-kHz external crystal oscillator (32kHzECO) provides  
precision timing with minimal power consumption using an  
external 32.768-kHz watch crystal (see Figure 6-3). The  
32kHzECO also connects directly to the sleep timer and provides  
the source for the RTC. The RTC uses a 1-second interrupt to  
implement the RTC functionality in firmware.  
The 1-kHz clock (CLK1K) is typically used for a background  
‘heartbeat’ timer. This clock inherently lends itself to low-power  
supervisory operations such as the watchdog timer and long  
sleep intervals using the central timewheel (CTW).  
The central timewheel is a 1-kHz, free-running, 13-bit counter  
clocked by the ILO. The central timewheel is always enabled,  
except in hibernate mode and when the CPU is stopped during  
debug on chip mode. It can be used to generate periodic  
interrupts for timing purposes or to wake the system from a  
low-power mode. Firmware can reset the central timewheel.  
Systems that require accurate timing should use the RTC  
capability instead of the central timewheel.  
The oscillator works in two distinct power modes. This allows  
users to trade off power consumption with noise immunity from  
neighboring circuits. The GPIO pins connected to the external  
crystal and capacitors are fixed.  
Figure 6-3. 32kHzECO Block Diagram  
The 100-kHz clock (CLK100K) works as a low-power system  
clock to run the CPU. It can also generate time intervals such as  
fast sleep intervals using the fast timewheel.  
XCLK32K  
32 kHz  
Crystal Osc  
The fast timewheel is a 100-kHz, 5-bit counter clocked by the ILO  
that can also be used to wake the system. The fast timewheel  
settings are programmable, and the counter automatically resets  
when the terminal count is reached. This enables flexible,  
periodic wakeups of the CPU at a higher rate than is allowed  
using the central timewheel. The fast timewheel can generate an  
optional interrupt each time the terminal count is reached.  
Xo  
Xi  
(Pin P15[2])  
(Pin P15[3])  
The 33-kHz clock (CLK33K) comes from a divide-by-3 operation  
on CLK100K. This output can be used as a reduced accuracy  
version of the 32.768-kHz ECO clock with no need for a crystal.  
32 kHz  
crystal  
External  
Components  
Capacitors  
6.1.2 External Oscillators  
6.1.2.1 MHz External Crystal Oscillator  
6.1.2.3 Digital System Interconnect  
The MHzECO provides high frequency, high precision clocking  
using an external crystal (see Figure 6-2). It supports a wide  
variety of crystal types, in the range of 4 to 25 MHz. When used  
in conjunction with the PLL, it can generate CPU and system  
clocks up to the device's maximum frequency (see  
Phase-Locked Loop). The GPIO pins connecting to the external  
crystal and capacitors are fixed. MHzECO accuracy depends on  
the crystal chosen.  
The DSI provides routing for clocks taken from external clock  
oscillators connected to I/O. The oscillators can also be  
generated within the device in the digital system and UDBs.  
While the primary DSI clock input provides access to all clocking  
resources, up to eight other DSI clocks (internally or externally  
generated) may be routed directly to the eight digital clock  
dividers. This is only possible if there are multiple precision clock  
sources.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 27 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
6.1.3 Clock Distribution  
Each clock divider consists of an 8-input multiplexer, a 16-bit  
clock divider (divide by 2 and higher) that generates ~50% duty  
cycle clocks, system clock resynchronization logic, and deglitch  
logic. The outputs from each digital clock tree can be routed into  
the digital system interconnect and then brought back into the  
clock system as an input, allowing clock chaining of up to 32 bits.  
All seven clock sources are inputs to the central clock distribution  
system. The distribution system is designed to create multiple  
high precision clocks. These clocks are customized for the  
design’s requirements and eliminate the common problems  
found with limited resolution prescalers attached to peripherals.  
The clock distribution system generates several types of clock  
trees.  
6.1.4 USB Clock Domain  
The USB clock domain is unique in that it operates largely  
asynchronously from the main clock network. The USB logic  
contains a synchronous bus interface to the chip, while running  
on an asynchronous clock to process USB data. The USB logic  
requires a 48 MHz frequency. This frequency can be generated  
from different sources, including DSI clock at 48 MHz or doubled  
value of 24 MHz from internal oscillator, DSI signal, or crystal  
oscillator.  
„ The system clock is used to select and supply the fastest clock  
in the system for general system clock requirements and clock  
synchronization of the PSoC device.  
„ Bus clock 16-bit divider uses the system clock to generate the  
system's bus clock used for data transfers. Bus clock is the  
source clock for the CPU clock divider.  
„ Eight fully programmable 16-bit clock dividers generate digital  
system clocks for general use in the digital system, as  
configured by the design’s requirements. Digital system clocks  
can generate custom clocks derived from any of the seven  
clock sources for any purpose. Examples include baud rate  
generators, accurate PWM periods, and timer clocks, and  
many others. If more than eight digital clock dividers are  
required, theUniversalDigitalBlocks(UDBs)andfixedfunction  
timer/counter/PWMs can also generate clocks.  
„ Four16-bitclockdividersgenerateclocksfortheanalogsystem  
components that require clocking, such as ADC and mixers.  
The analog clock dividers include skew control to ensure that  
critical analog events do not occur simultaneously with digital  
switching events. This is done to reduce analog system noise.  
6.2 Power System  
The power system consists of separate analog, digital, and I/O  
supply pins, labeled Vdda, Vddd, and Vddio×, respectively. It  
also includes two internal 1.8 V regulators that provide the digital  
(Vccd) and analog (Vcca) supplies for the internal core logic. The  
output pins of the regulators (Vccd and Vcca) and the Vddio pins  
must have capacitors connected as shown in Figure 6-4. The  
two Vccd pins must be shorted together, with as short a trace as  
possible, and connected to a 1-µF ±10% ×5R capacitor. The  
power system also contains a sleep regulator, an I2C regulator,  
and a hibernate regulator.  
Figure 6-4. PSoC Power System  
µF  
Vddd  
1
Vddio2  
Vddio0  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
I/O Supply  
I/O Supply  
Vddio0  
0.1µF  
I2C  
Regulator  
Sleep  
Regulator  
Digital  
Vdda  
Domain  
Vdda  
Vcca  
Analog  
Regulator  
0.1µF  
Digital  
Regulators  
Vssb  
.
µF  
1
Vssa  
Analog  
Domain  
Hibernate  
Regulator  
I/O Supply  
I/O Supply  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
0.1 µF  
Vddd  
Vddio1  
Vddio3  
Note The two Vccd pins must be connected together with as short a trace as possible. A trace under the device is recommended, as  
shown in Figure 2-6 on page 10.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 28 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
6.2.1 Power Modes  
Active is the main processing mode. Its functionality is  
configurable. Each power controllable subsystem is enabled or  
disabled by using separate power configuration template  
registers. In alternate active mode, fewer subsystems are  
enabled, reducing power. In sleep mode most resources are  
disabled regardless of the template settings. Sleep mode is  
optimized to provide timed sleep intervals and RTC functionality.  
The lowest power mode is hibernate, which retains register and  
SRAM state, but no clocks, and allows wakeup only from I/O  
pins. Figure 6-5 illustrates the allowable transitions between  
power modes.  
PSoC 3 devices have four different power modes, as shown in  
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3. The power modes allow a design to  
easily provide required functionality and processing power while  
simultaneously minimizing power consumption and maximizing  
battery life in low-power and portable devices.  
PSoC 3 power modes, in order of decreasing power  
consumption are:  
„ Active  
„ Alternate Active  
„ Sleep  
.
„ Hibernate  
Table 6-2. Power Modes  
Power  
Wakeup  
Source  
Description  
Entry Condition  
Active Clocks  
Regulator  
Modes  
Active  
Primary mode of operation, all periph- Wakeup, reset,  
Any interrupt Any  
All regulators available. Digital  
erals available (programmable)  
manual register  
entry  
(programmable) and analog regulators can be  
disabled if external regulation  
used.  
Alternate  
Active  
Similar to Active mode, and is typically Manual register  
configured to have fewer peripherals entry  
active to reduce power. One possible  
Any interrupt Any  
All regulators available. Digital  
(programmable) and analog regulators can be  
disabled if external regulation  
configuration is to use the UDBs for  
used.  
processing, with the CPU turned off  
Sleep  
Allsubsystemsautomaticallydisabled Manual register  
entry  
Comparator, ILO/kHzECO  
Both digital and analog  
regulators buzzed.  
Digital and analog regulators  
can be disabled if external  
regulation used.  
2
PICU, I C,  
RTC, CTW,  
LVD  
Hibernate Allsubsystemsautomaticallydisabled Manual register  
Lowest power consuming mode with entry  
all peripherals and internal regulators  
disabled, excepthibernateregulatoris  
enabled  
PICU  
Only hibernate regulator active.  
Configuration and memory contents  
retained  
Table 6-3. Power Modes Wakeup Time and Power Consumption  
Sleep  
Modes  
Wakeup  
Time  
Current  
(Typ)  
Code  
Digital  
Analog  
ClockSources  
Available  
Reset  
Wakeup Sources  
Sources  
Execution Resources Resources  
Active  
1.2 mA[16]  
Yes  
All  
All  
All  
All  
All  
All  
All  
All  
Alternate  
Active  
User  
defined  
<15 µs  
1 µA  
No  
I2C  
Comparator ILO/kHzECO  
Comparator,  
PICU, I2C, RTC,  
CTW, LVD  
XRES, LVD,  
WDR  
Sleep  
Hibernate <100 µs  
200 nA  
No  
None  
None  
None  
PICU  
XRES  
Note  
16. Bus clock off. Execute from CPU instruction buffer at 6 MHz. See Table 11-2 on page 65.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 29 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 6-5. Power Mode Transitions  
central timewheel provides periodic interrupts to allow the  
system to wake up, poll peripherals, or perform real-time  
functions. Reset event sources include the external reset I/O pin  
(XRES), WDT, and precision reset (PRES).  
Active  
6.2.2 Boost Converter  
Applications that use a supply voltage of less than 1.71 V, such  
as solar or single cell battery supplies, may use the on-chip boost  
converter. The boost converter may also be used in any system  
that requires a higher operating voltage than the supply provides.  
For instance, this includes driving 5.0 V LCD glass in a 3.3 V  
system. The boost converter accepts an input voltage as low as  
0.5 V. With one low cost inductor it produces a selectable output  
voltage sourcing enough current to operate the PSoC and other  
on-board components.  
Manual  
Sleep  
Hibernate  
Buzz  
Alternate  
Active  
The boost converter accepts an input voltage from 0.5 V to 5.5 V  
(Vbat), and can start up with Vbat as low as 0.5 V. The converter  
provides a user configurable output voltage of 1.8 to 5.0 V  
(Vboost). Vbat is typically less than Vboost; if Vbat is greater than  
or equal to Vboost, then Vboost will be the same as Vbat. The  
block can deliver up to 50 mA (Iboost) depending on  
configuration.  
6.2.1.1 Active Mode  
Active mode is the primary operating mode of the device. When  
in active mode, the active configuration template bits control  
which available resources are enabled or disabled. When a  
resource is disabled, the digital clocks are gated, analog bias  
currents are disabled, and leakage currents are reduced as  
appropriate. User firmware can dynamically control subsystem  
power by setting and clearing bits in the active configuration  
template. The CPU can disable itself, in which case the CPU is  
automatically reenabled at the next wakeup event.  
Four pins are associated with the boost converter: Vbat, Vssb,  
Vboost, and Ind. The boosted output voltage is sensed at the  
Vboost pin and must be connected directly to the chip’s supply  
inputs. An inductor is connected between the Vbat and Ind pins.  
You can optimize the inductor value to increase the boost  
converter efficiency based on input voltage, output voltage,  
current and switching frequency. The external Schottky diode  
shown in Figure 6-6 is required only in cases when Vboost >  
3.6 V.  
When a wakeup event occurs, the global mode is always  
returned to active, and the CPU is automatically enabled,  
regardless of its template settings. Active mode is the default  
global power mode upon boot.  
6.2.1.2 Alternate Active Mode  
Figure 6-6. Application for Boost Converter  
Alternate Active mode is very similar to Active mode. In alternate  
active mode, fewer subsystems are enabled, to reduce power  
consumption. One possible configuration is to turn off the CPU  
and flash, and run peripherals at full speed.  
Vdda Vddd Vddio  
Vboost  
Ind  
Optional  
Schottky Diode  
Only required  
Vboost>3.6 V  
6.2.1.3 Sleep Mode  
Sleep mode reduces power consumption when a resume time of  
15 µs is acceptable. The wake time is used to ensure that the  
regulator outputs are stable enough to directly enter active  
mode.  
22 µF 0. 1µF  
PSoC  
10 µH  
22µF  
SMP  
6.2.1.4 Hibernate Mode  
Vbat  
Vssb  
In hibernate mode nearly all of the internal functions are  
disabled. Internal voltages are reduced to the minimal level to  
keep vital systems alive. Configuration state is preserved in  
hibernate mode and SRAM memory is retained. GPIOs  
configured as digital outputs maintain their previous values and  
external GPIO pin interrupt settings are preserved. The device  
can only return from hibernate mode in response to an external  
I/O interrupt. The resume time from hibernate mode is less than  
100 µs.  
Vssa  
Vssd  
The switching frequency can be set to 100 kHz, 400 kHz, 2 MHz,  
or 32 kHz to optimize efficiency and component cost. The  
100 kHz, 400 kHz, and 2 MHz switching frequencies are  
generated using oscillators internal to the boost converter block.  
When the 32-kHz switching frequency is selected, the clock is  
derived from a 32 kHz external crystal oscillator. The 32-kHz  
external clock is primarily intended for boost standby mode.  
6.2.1.5 Wakeup Events  
Wakeup events are configurable and can come from an interrupt  
or device reset. A wakeup event restores the system to active  
mode. Firmware enabled interrupt sources include internally  
generated interrupts, power supervisor, central timewheel, and  
I/O interrupts. Internal interrupt sources can come from a variety  
of peripherals, such as analog comparators and UDBs. The  
At 2 MHz the Vboost output is limited to 2 × Vbat, and at 400 kHz  
Vboost is limited to 4 × Vbat.  
The boost converter can be operated in two different modes:  
active and standby. Active mode is the normal mode of operation  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 30 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
where the boost regulator actively generates a regulated output  
voltage. In standby mode, most boost functions are disabled,  
thus reducing power consumption of the boost circuit. The  
converter can be configured to provide low-power, low-current  
regulation in the standby mode. The external 32 kHz crystal can  
be used to generate inductor boost pulses on the rising and  
falling edge of the clock when the output voltage is less than the  
programmed value. This is called automatic thump mode (ATM).  
Figure 6-7. Resets  
Vddd Vdda  
Power  
Voltage  
Level  
Processor  
Interrupt  
Monitors  
The boost typically draws 200 µA in active mode and 12 µA in  
standby mode. The boost operating modes must be used in  
conjunction with chip power modes to minimize the total chip  
power consumption. Table 6-4 lists the boost power modes  
available in different chip power modes.  
Reset  
Pin  
External  
Reset  
Reset  
Controller  
System  
Reset  
Table 6-4. Chip and Boost Power Modes Compatibility  
Watchdog  
Timer  
Chip Power Modes  
Boost Power Modes  
Chip – Active mode  
Boost can be operated in either active  
or standby mode.  
Software  
Reset  
Register  
Chip – Sleep mode  
Boost can be operated in either active  
or standby mode. However, it is recom-  
mended to operate boost in standby  
mode for low-power consumption  
Chip – Hibernate mode Boost can only be operated in active  
mode. However, it is recommended not  
to use boost in chip hibernate mode  
due to high current consumption in  
boost active mode  
The term device reset indicates that the processor as well as  
analog and digital peripherals and registers are reset.  
A reset status register holds the source of the most recent reset  
or power voltage monitoring interrupt. The program may  
examine this register to detect and report exception conditions.  
This register is cleared after a power on reset.  
If the boost converter is not used in a given application, tie the  
Vbat, Vssb, and Vboost pins to ground and leave the Ind pin  
unconnected.  
6.3.1 Reset Sources  
6.3.1.1 Power Voltage Level Monitors  
„ IPOR – Initial POR  
6.3 Reset  
CY8C36 has multiple internal and external reset sources  
available. The reset sources are:  
At initial power on, IPOR monitors the power voltages Vddd  
and Vdda, both directly at the pins and at the outputs of the  
corresponding internal regulators. The trip level is not precise.  
It is set to approximately 1 volt, which is below the lowest  
specified operating voltage but high enough for the internal  
circuits to be reset and to hold their reset state. The monitor  
generates a reset pulse that is at least 100 ns wide. It may be  
much wider if one or more of the voltages ramps up slowly.  
„ Power source monitoring – The analog and digital power  
voltages, Vdda, Vddd, Vcca, and Vccd are monitored in several  
different modes during power up, active mode, and sleep mode  
(buzzing). If any of the voltages goes outside predetermined  
ranges then a reset is generated. The monitors are  
programmable to generate an interrupt to the processor under  
To save power the IPOR circuit is disabled when the internal  
digital supply is stable. Voltage supervision is then handed off  
to the precise low voltage reset (PRES) circuit. When the  
voltage is high enough for PRES to release, the IMO starts.  
certain conditions before reaching the reset thresholds.  
„ External – The device can be reset from an external source by  
pulling the reset pin (XRES) low. The XRES pin includes an  
internal pull-up to Vddio1. Vddd, Vdda, and Vddio1 must all  
have voltage applied before the part comes out of reset.  
„ PRES – Precise Low Voltage Reset  
This circuit monitors the outputs of the analog and digital  
internal regulators after power up. The regulator outputs are  
compared to a precise reference voltage. The response to a  
PRES trip is identical to an IPOR reset.  
„ Watchdog timer – A watchdog timer monitors the execution of  
instructions by the processor. If the watchdog timer is not reset  
by firmware within a certain period of time, the watchdog timer  
generates a reset.  
In normal operating mode, the program cannot disable the  
digital PRES circuit. The analog regulator can be disabled,  
which also disables the analog portion of the PRES. The PRES  
circuit is disabled automatically during sleep and hibernate  
modes, with one exception: During sleep mode the regulators  
are periodically activated (buzzed) to provide supervisory  
services and to reduce wakeup time. At these times the PRES  
circuit is also buzzed to allow periodic voltage monitoring.  
„ Software – The device can be reset under program control.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 31 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
„ ALVI, DLVI, AHVI – Analog/Digital Low Voltage Interrupt,  
Analog High Voltage Interrupt  
6.4 I/O System and Routing  
PSoC I/Os are extremely flexible. Every GPIO has analog and  
digital I/O capability. All I/Os have a large number of drive modes,  
which are set at POR. PSoC also provides up to four individual  
I/O voltage domains through the Vddio pins.  
Interrupt circuits are available to detect when Vdda and Vddd  
go outside a voltage range. For AHVI, Vdda is compared to a  
fixed trip level. For ALVI and DLVI, Vdda and Vddd are  
compared to trip levels that are programmable, as listed in  
Table 6-5. ALVI and DLVI can also be configured to generate  
a device reset instead of an interrupt.  
There are two types of I/O pins on every device; those with USB  
provide a third type. Both General Purpose I/O (GPIO) and  
Special I/O (SIO) provide similar digital functionality. The primary  
differences are their analog capability and drive strength.  
Devices that include USB also provide two USBIO pins that  
support specific USB functionality as well as limited GPIO  
capability.  
Table 6-5. Analog/Digital Low Voltage Interrupt, Analog High  
Voltage Interrupt  
Normal  
Voltage  
Range  
Available Trip  
Interrupt Supply  
Accuracy  
Settings  
All I/O pins are available for use as digital inputs and outputs for  
both the CPU and digital peripherals. In addition, all I/O pins can  
generate an interrupt. The flexible and advanced capabilities of  
the PSoC I/O, combined with any signal to any pin routability,  
greatly simplify circuit design and board layout. All GPIO pins can  
be used for analog input, CapSense[17], and LCD segment drive,  
while SIO pins are used for voltages in excess of VDDA and for  
programmable output voltages.  
DLVI  
ALVI  
AHVI  
Vddd 1.71 V–5.5 V 1.70V–5.45 Vin  
±2%  
250 mV  
increments  
Vdda 1.71 V–5.5 V 1.70V–5.45 Vin  
±2%  
±2%  
250 mV  
increments  
Vdda 1.71 V–5.5 V 5.75 V  
„ Features supported by both GPIO and SIO:  
‡ User programmable port reset state  
The monitors are disabled until after IPOR. During sleep mode  
these circuits are periodically activated (buzzed). If an interrupt  
occurs during buzzing then the system first enters its wake up  
sequence. The interrupt is then recognized and may be  
serviced.  
‡ SeparateI/OsuppliesandvoltagesforuptofourgroupsofI/O  
‡ Digital peripherals use DSI to connect the pins  
‡ Input or output or both for CPU and DMA  
‡ Eight drive modes  
‡ Every pin can be an interrupt source configured as rising  
edge, falling edge or both edges. If required, level sensitive  
interrupts are supported through the DSI  
‡ Dedicated port interrupt vector for each port  
‡ Slew rate controlled digital output drive mode  
‡ Access port control and configuration registers on either port  
basis or pin basis  
‡ Separateportread(PS)andwrite(DR)dataregisterstoavoid  
read modify write errors  
‡ Special functionality on a pin by pin basis  
„ Additional features only provided on the GPIO pins:  
‡ LCD segment drive on LCD equipped devices  
‡ CapSense[17]  
‡ Analog input and output capability  
‡ Continuous 100 µA clamp current capability  
6.3.1.2 Other Reset Sources  
„ XRES – External Reset  
PSoC 3 has either a single GPIO pin that is configured as an  
external reset or a dedicated XRES pin. Either the dedicated  
XRES pin or the GPIO pin, if configured, holds the part in reset  
while held active (low). The response to an XRES is the same  
as to an IPOR reset.  
The external reset is active low. It includes an internal pull-up  
resistor. XRES is active during sleep and hibernate modes.  
„ SRES – Software Reset  
A reset can be commanded under program control by setting  
a bit in the software reset register. This is done either directly  
by the program or indirectly by DMA access. The response to  
a SRES is the same as after an IPOR reset.  
Another register bit exists to disable this function.  
‡ Standard drive strength down to 1.7 V  
„ WRES – Watchdog Timer Reset  
„ Additional features only provided on SIO pins:  
‡ Higher drive strength than GPIO  
‡ Hot swap capability (5 V tolerance at any operating VDD  
‡ Programmable and regulated high input and output drive  
levels down to 1.2 V  
‡ No analog input, CapSense, or LCD capability  
‡ Over voltage tolerance up to 5.5 V  
‡ SIO can act as a general purpose analog comparator  
„ USBIO features:  
‡ Full speed USB 2.0 compliant I/O  
The watchdog reset detects when the software program is no  
longer being executed correctly. To indicate to the watchdog  
timer that it is running correctly, the program must periodically  
reset the timer. If the timer is not reset before a user-specified  
amount of time, then a reset is generated.  
)
Note IPOR disables the watchdog function. The program must  
enable the watchdog function at an appropriate point in the  
code by setting a register bit. When this bit is set, it cannot be  
cleared again except by an IPOR power on reset event.  
‡ Highest drive strength for general purpose use  
‡ Input, output, or both for CPU and DMA  
‡ Input, output, or both for digital peripherals  
‡ Digital output (CMOS) drive mode  
‡ Each pin can be an interrupt source configured as rising  
edge, falling edge, or both edges  
Note  
17. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 32 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 6-8. GPIO Block Diagram  
Digital Input Path  
Naming Convention  
PRT[x]CTL  
PRT[x]DBL_SYNC_IN  
‘x’ = Port Number  
‘y’ = Pin Number  
PRT[x]PS  
Digital System Input  
PICU[x]INTTYPE[y]  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Pin Interrupt Signal  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Input Buffer Disable  
Interrupt  
Logic  
Digital Output Path  
PRT[x]SLW  
PRT[x]SYNC_OUT  
Vddio Vddio  
PRT[x]DR  
0
1
In  
Digital System Output  
PRT[x]BYP  
Vddio  
Drive  
Logic  
PRT[x]DM2  
PRT[x]DM1  
PRT[x]DM0  
Slew  
Cntl  
PIN  
Bidirectional Control  
PRT[x]BIE  
OE  
Analog  
1
0
1
0
1
Capsense Global Control  
CAPS[x]CFG1  
Switches  
PRT[x]AG  
Analog Global Enable  
PRT[x]AMUX  
Analog Mux Enable  
LCD  
Display  
Data  
Logic & MUX  
PRT[x]LCD_COM_SEG  
PRT[x]LCD_EN  
LCD Bias Bus  
5
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 33 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 6-9. SIO Input/Output Block Diagram  
Digital Input Path  
Naming Convention  
‘x’ = Port Number  
‘y’ = Pin Number  
PRT[x]SIO_HYST_EN  
PRT[x]SIO_DIFF  
Buffer  
Thresholds  
Reference Level  
PRT[x]DBL_SYNC_IN  
PRT[x]PS  
Digital System Input  
PICU[x]INTTYPE[y]  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Pin Interrupt Signal  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Input Buffer Disable  
Interrupt  
Logic  
Digital Output Path  
Reference Level  
PRT[x]SIO_CFG  
PRT[x]SLW  
Driver  
Vhigh  
PRT[x]SYNC_OUT  
PRT[x]DR  
0
1
In  
Digital System Output  
PRT[x]BYP  
Drive  
Logic  
PRT[x]DM2  
PRT[x]DM1  
PRT[x]DM0  
Slew  
Cntl  
PIN  
Bidirectional Control  
PRT[x]BIE  
OE  
Figure 6-10. USBIO Block Diagram  
Digital Input Path  
Naming Convention  
‘x’ = Port Number  
‘y’ = Pin Number  
USB Receiver Circuitry  
PRT[x]DBL_SYNC_IN  
USBIO_CR1[0,1]  
Digital System Input  
PICU[x]INTTYPE[y]  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Pin Interrupt Signal  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Interrupt  
Logic  
Digital Output Path  
PRT[x]SYNC_OUT  
USBIO_CR1[7]  
D+ pin only  
Vddd Vddd  
USB or I/O  
Vddd  
5 k  
USB SIE Control for USB Mode  
Vddd  
USBIO_CR1[4,5]  
Digital System Output  
PRT[x]BYP  
0
1
In  
Drive  
1.5 k  
Logic  
PIN  
USBIO_CR1[2]  
USBIO_CR1[3]  
USBIO_CR1[6]  
D+ 1.5 k  
D+D- 5 k  
Open Drain  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 34 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
6.4.1 Drive Modes  
Each GPIO and SIO pin is individually configurable into one of the eight drive modes listed in Table 6-6. Three configuration bits are  
used for each pin (DM[2:0]) and set in the PRTxDM[2:0] registers. Figure 6-11 depicts a simplified pin view based on each of the eight  
drive modes. Table 6-6 shows the I/O pin’s drive state based on the port data register value or digital array signal if bypass mode is  
selected. Note that the actual I/O pin voltage is determined by a combination of the selected drive mode and the load at the pin. For  
example, if a GPIO pin is configured for resistive pull-up mode and driven high while the pin is floating, the voltage measured at the  
pin is a high logic state. If the same GPIO pin is externally tied to ground then the voltage unmeasured at the pin is a low logic state.  
Figure 6-11. Drive Mode  
Vddio  
Vddio  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
Pin  
Pin  
Pin  
Pin  
0. High Impedance 1. High Impedance  
Analog Digital  
2. Resistive  
Pull-Up  
3. Resistive  
Pull-Down  
Vddio  
Vddio  
Vddio  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
Pin  
Pin  
Pin  
Pin  
4. Open Drain,  
Drives Low  
5. Open Drain,  
Drives High  
6. Strong Drive  
7. Resistive  
Pull-Up and Pull-Down  
Table 6-6. Drive Modes  
Diagram  
Drive Mode  
PRTxDM2  
PRTxDM1  
PRTxDM0  
PRTxDR = 1  
PRTxDR = 0  
High Z  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
High impedence analog  
High Impedance digital  
Resistive pull-up[18]  
Resistive pull-down[18]  
Open drain, drives low  
Open drain, drive high  
Strong drive  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
High Z  
High Z  
High Z  
Res High (5K)  
Strong High  
High Z  
Strong Low  
Res Low (5K)  
Strong Low  
High Z  
Strong High  
Strong High  
Res High (5K)  
Strong Low  
Res Low (5K)  
Resistive pull-up and pull-down[18]  
Note  
18. Resistive pull-up and pull-down are not available with SIO in regulated output mode.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 35 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
„ High Impedance Analog  
second user selected drive mode such as strong drive (set using  
PRT×DM[2:0] registers) for output signals on the same pin,  
based on the state of an auxiliary control bus signal. The  
bidirectional capability is useful for processor busses and  
communications interfaces such as the SPI Slave MISO pin that  
requires dynamic hardware control of the output buffer.  
The default reset state with both the output driver and digital  
input buffer turned off. This prevents any current from flowing  
in the I/O’s digital input buffer due to a floating voltage. This  
state is recommended for pins that are floating or that support  
an analog voltage. High impedance analog pins do not provide  
digital input functionality.  
The auxiliary control bus routes up to 16 UDB or digital peripheral  
generated output enable signals to one or more pins.  
To achieve the lowest chip current in sleep modes, all I/Os  
must either be configured to the high impedance analog mode,  
or have their pins driven to a power supply rail by the PSoC  
device or by external circuitry.  
6.4.4 Slew Rate Limited Mode  
GPIO and SIO pins have fast and slow output slew rate options  
for strong and open drain drive modes, not resistive drive modes.  
Because it results in reduced EMI, the slow edge rate option is  
recommended for signals that are not speed critical, generally  
less than 1 MHz. The fast slew rate is for signals between 1 MHz  
and 33 MHz. The slew rate is individually configurable for each  
pin, and is set by the PRT×SLW registers.  
„ High Impedance Digital  
The input buffer is enabled for digital signal input. This is the  
standard high impedance (HiZ) state recommended for digital  
inputs.  
„ Resistive pull-up or resistive pull-down  
6.4.5 Pin Interrupts  
Resistive pull-up or pull-down, respectively, provides a series  
resistance in one of the data states and strong drive in the  
other. Pins can be used for digital input and output in these  
modes. Interfacing to mechanical switches is a common  
application for these modes. Resistive pull-up and pull-down  
are not available with SIO in regulated output mode.  
All GPIO and SIO pins are able to generate interrupts to the  
system. All eight pins in each port interface to their own Port  
Interrupt Control Unit (PICU) and associated interrupt vector.  
Each pin of the port is independently configurable to detect rising  
edge, falling edge, both edge interrupts, or to not generate an  
interrupt.  
„ Open Drain, Drives High and Open Drain, Drives Low  
Depending on the configured mode for each pin, each time an  
interrupt event occurs on a pin, its corresponding status bit of the  
interrupt status register is set to “1” and an interrupt request is  
sent to the interrupt controller. Each PICU has its own interrupt  
vector in the interrupt controller and the pin status register  
providing easy determination of the interrupt source down to the  
pin level.  
Open drain modes provide high impedance in one of the data  
states and strong drive in the other. Pins can be used for digital  
input and output in these modes. A common application for  
these modes is driving the I2C bus signal lines.  
„ Strong Drive  
Provides a strong CMOS output drive in either high or low  
state. This is the standard output mode for pins. Strong Drive  
mode pins must not be used as inputs under normal  
circumstances. This mode is often used to drive digital output  
signals or external FETs.  
Port pin interrupts remain active in all sleep modes allowing the  
PSoC device to wake from an externally generated interrupt.  
While level sensitive interrupts are not directly supported;  
universal digital blocks (UDB) provide this functionality to the  
system when needed.  
„ Resistive pull-up and pull-down  
Similar to the resistive pull-up and resistive pull-down modes  
except the pin is always in series with a resistor. The high data  
state is pull-up while the low data state is pull-down. This mode  
is most often used when other signals that may cause shorts  
can drive the bus. Resistive pull-up and pull-down are not  
available with SIO in regulated output mode.  
6.4.6 Input Buffer Mode  
GPIO and SIO input buffers can be configured at the port level  
for the default CMOS input thresholds or the optional LVTTL  
input thresholds. All input buffers incorporate Schmitt triggers for  
input hysteresis. Additionally, individual pin input buffers can be  
disabled in any drive mode.  
6.4.2 Pin Registers  
6.4.7 I/O Power Supplies  
Registers to configure and interact with pins come in two forms  
that may be used interchangeably.  
Up to four I/O pin power supplies are provided depending on the  
device and package. Each I/O supply must be less than or equal  
to the voltage on the chip’s analog (VDDA) pin. This feature allows  
users to provide different I/O voltage levels for different pins on  
the device. Refer to the specific device package pinout to  
determine Vddio capability for a given port and pin.  
All I/O registers are available in the standard port form, where  
each bit of the register corresponds to one of the port pins. This  
register form is efficient for quickly reconfiguring multiple port  
pins at the same time.  
I/O registers are also available in pin form, which combines the  
eight most commonly used port register bits into a single register  
for each pin. This enables very fast configuration changes to  
individual pins with a single register write.  
The SIO port pins support an additional regulated high output  
capability, as described in Adjustable Output Level.  
6.4.8 Analog Connections  
These connections apply only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may  
be used as analog inputs or outputs. The analog voltage present  
on the pin must not exceed the Vddio supply voltage to which the  
GPIO belongs. Each GPIO may connect to one of the analog  
6.4.3 Bidirectional Mode  
High speed bidirectional capability allows pins to provide both  
the high impedance digital drive mode for input signals and a  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 36 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
global busses or to one of the analog mux buses to connect any  
pin to any internal analog resource such as ADC or comparators.  
In addition, select pins provide direct connections to specific  
analog features such as the high current DACs or uncommitted  
opamps.  
Figure 6-12. SIO Reference for Input and Output  
Input Path  
Digital  
Input  
6.4.9 CapSense  
Vinref  
This section applies only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may be  
used to create CapSense buttons and sliders[19]. See the  
“CapSense” section on page 57 for more information.  
6.4.10 LCD Segment Drive  
Reference  
Generator  
SIO_Ref  
This section applies only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may be  
used to generate Segment and Common drive signals for direct  
glass drive of LCD glass. See the “LCD Direct Drive” section on  
page 56 for details.  
PIN  
Voutref  
Output Path  
Driver  
Vhigh  
6.4.11 Adjustable Output Level  
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO port pins support the  
ability to provide a regulated high output level for interface to  
external signals that are lower in voltage than the SIO’s  
respective Vddio. SIO pins are individually configurable to output  
either the standard Vddio level or the regulated output, which is  
based on an internally generated reference. Typically a voltage  
DAC (VDAC) is used to generate the reference (see Figure  
6-12). The “DAC” section on page 57 has more details on VDAC  
use and reference routing to the SIO pins. Resistive pull-up and  
pull-down drive modes are not available with SIO in regulated  
output mode.  
Digital  
Output  
Drive  
Logic  
6.4.12 Adjustable Input Level  
6.4.13 SIO as Comparator  
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO pins by default support  
the standard CMOS and LVTTL input levels but also support a  
differential mode with programmable levels. SIO pins are  
grouped into pairs. Each pair shares a reference generator block  
which, is used to set the digital input buffer reference level for  
interface to external signals that differ in voltage from Vddio. The  
reference sets the pins voltage threshold for a high logic level  
(see Figure 6-12). Available input thresholds are:  
This section applies only to SIO pins. The adjustable input level  
feature of the SIOs as explained in the Adjustable Input Level  
section can be used to construct a comparator. The threshold for  
the comparator is provided by the SIO's reference generator. The  
reference generator has the option to set the analog signal  
routed through the analog global line as threshold for the  
comparator. Note that a pair of SIO pins share the same  
threshold.  
„ 0.5 × Vddio  
„ 0.4 × Vddio  
„ 0.5 × VREF  
„ VREF  
The digital input path in Figure 6-9 on page 34 illustrates this  
functionality. In the figure, ‘Reference level’ is the analog signal  
routed through the analog global. The hysteresis feature can  
also be enabled for the input buffer of the SIO, which increases  
noise immunity for the comparator.  
Typically a voltage DAC (VDAC) generates the VREF reference.  
“DAC” section on page 57 has more details on VDAC use and  
reference routing to the SIO pins.  
6.4.14 Hot Swap  
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO pins support ‘hot swap’  
capability to plug into an application without loading the signals  
that are connected to the SIO pins even when no power is  
applied to the PSoC device. This allows the unpowered PSoC to  
maintain a high impedance load to the external device while also  
preventing the PSoC from being powered through a GPIO pin’s  
protection diode.  
Note  
19. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 37 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
6.4.15 Over Voltage Tolerance  
‡ High current IDAC outputs  
‡ External reference inputs  
All I/O pins provide an over voltage tolerance feature at any  
operating VDD  
.
6.4.19 JTAG Boundary Scan  
„ There are no current limitations for the SIO pins as they present a  
The device supports standard JTAG boundary scan chains on all  
I/O pins for board level test.  
high impedance load to the external circuit where Vddio < VIN  
5.5 V.  
<
7. Digital Subsystem  
„ TheGPIOpinsmustbelimitedto100µAusingacurrentlimiting  
resistor. GPIO pins clamp the pin voltage to approximately one  
The digital programmable system creates application specific  
combinations of both standard and advanced digital peripherals  
and custom logic functions. These peripherals and logic are then  
interconnected to each other and to any pin on the device,  
providing a high level of design flexibility and IP security.  
diode above the Vddio supply where Vddio < VIN < VDDA  
.
„ In case of a GPIO pin configured for analog input/output, the  
analog voltage on the pin must not exceed the Vddio supply  
voltage to which the GPIO belongs.  
A common application for this feature is connection to a bus such  
as I2C where different devices are running from different supply  
voltages. In the I2C case, the PSoC chip is configured into the  
Open Drain, Drives Low mode for the SIO pin. This allows an  
external pull-up to pull the I2C bus voltage above the PSoC pin  
supply. For example, the PSoC chip could operate at 1.8 V, and  
an external device could run from 5 V. Note that the SIO pin’s VIH  
and VIL levels are determined by the associated Vddio supply  
pin.  
The features of the digital programmable system are outlined  
here to provide an overview of capabilities and architecture. You  
do not need to interact directly with the programmable digital  
system at the hardware and register level. PSoC Creator  
provides a high level schematic capture graphical interface to  
automatically place and route resources similar to PLDs.  
The main components of the digital programmable system are:  
„ Universal Digital Blocks (UDB) – These form the core  
functionality of the digital programmable system. UDBs are a  
collection of uncommitted logic (PLD) and structural logic  
(Datapath) optimized to create all common embedded  
peripherals and customized functionality that are application or  
design specific.  
The I/O pin must be configured into a high impedance drive  
mode, open drain low drive mode, or pull-down drive mode, for  
over voltage tolerance to work properly. Absolute maximum  
ratings for the device must be observed for all I/O pins.  
6.4.16 Reset Configuration  
„ Universal Digital Block Array – UDB blocks are arrayed within  
a matrix of programmable interconnect. The UDB array  
structure is homogeneous and allows for flexible mapping of  
digital functions onto the array. The array supports extensive  
and flexible routing interconnects between UDBs and the  
Digital System Interconnect.  
While reset is active all I/Os are reset to and held in the High  
Impedance Analog state. After reset is released, the state can be  
reprogrammed on a port-by-port basis to pull-down or pull-up. To  
ensure correct reset operation, the port reset configuration data  
is stored in special nonvolatile registers. The stored reset data is  
automatically transferred to the port reset configuration registers  
at reset release.  
„ Digital System Interconnect (DSI) – Digital signals from  
Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs), fixed function peripherals, I/O  
pins, interrupts, DMA, and other system core signals are  
attached to the Digital System Interconnect to implement full  
featureddeviceconnectivity.TheDSIallowsanydigitalfunction  
to any pin or other feature routability when used with the  
Universal Digital Block Array.  
6.4.17 Low-Power Functionality  
In all low-power modes the I/O pins retain their state until the part  
is awakened and changed or reset. To awaken the part, use a  
pin interrupt, because the port interrupt logic continues to  
function in all low-power modes.  
Figure 7-1. CY8C36 Digital Programmable Architecture  
6.4.18 Special Pin Functionality  
Some pins on the device include additional special functionality  
in addition to their GPIO or SIO functionality. The specific special  
function pins are listed in Pinouts on page 5. The special features  
are:  
Digital Core System  
and Fixed Function Peripherals  
DSI Routing Interface  
„ Digital  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
‡ 4- to 25-MHz crystal oscillator  
‡ 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator  
‡ Wake from sleep on I2C address match. Any pin can be used  
for I2C if wake from sleep is not required.  
‡ JTAG interface pins  
‡ SWD interface pins  
‡ SWV interface pins  
‡ External reset  
DSI Routing Interface  
„ Analog  
Digital Core System  
and Fixed Function Peripherals  
‡ Opamp inputs and outputs  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 38 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
‡ Voltage  
‡ PWM  
7.1 Example Peripherals  
The flexibility of the CY8C36 family’s Universal Digital Blocks  
(UDBs) and Analog Blocks allow the user to create a wide range  
of components (peripherals). The most common peripherals  
were built and characterized by Cypress and are shown in the  
PSoC Creator component catalog, however, users may also  
create their own custom components using PSoC Creator. Using  
PSoC Creator, users may also create their own components for  
reuse within their organization, for example sensor interfaces,  
proprietary algorithms, and display interfaces.  
„ Comparators  
„ Mixers  
7.1.3 Example System Function Components  
The following is a sample of the system function components  
available in PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact  
amount of hardware resources (UDBs, DFB taps, SC/CT blocks,  
routing, RAM, flash) used by a component varies with the  
features selected in PSoC Creator for the component.  
The number of components available through PSoC Creator is  
too numerous to list in the data sheet, and the list is always  
growing. An example of a component available for use in  
CY8C36 family, but, not explicitly called out in this data sheet is  
the UART component.  
„ CapSense  
„ LCD Drive  
„ LCD Control  
„ Filters  
7.1.1 Example Digital Components  
The following is a sample of the digital components available in  
PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact amount of  
hardware resources (UDBs, routing, RAM, flash) used by a  
component varies with the features selected in PSoC Creator for  
the component.  
7.1.4 Designing with PSoC Creator  
7.1.4.1 More Than a Typical IDE  
A successful design tool allows for the rapid development and  
deployment of both simple and complex designs. It reduces or  
eliminates any learning curve. It makes the integration of a new  
design into the production stream straightforward.  
„ Communications  
‡ I2C  
‡ UART  
PSoC Creator is that design tool.  
‡ SPI  
PSoC Creator is a full featured Integrated Development  
Environment (IDE) for hardware and software design. It is  
optimized specifically for PSoC devices and combines a modern,  
powerful software development platform with a sophisticated  
graphical design tool. This unique combination of tools makes  
PSoC Creator the most flexible embedded design platform  
available.  
„ Functions  
‡ EMIF  
‡ PWMs  
‡ Timers  
‡ Counters  
„ Logic  
‡ NOT  
‡ OR  
‡ XOR  
‡ AND  
Graphical design entry simplifies the task of configuring a  
particular part. You can select the required functionality from an  
extensive catalog of components and place it in your design. All  
components are parameterized and have an editor dialog that  
allows you to tailor functionality to your needs.  
7.1.2 Example Analog Components  
PSoC Creator automatically configures clocks and routes the I/O  
to the selected pins and then generates APIs to give the  
application complete control over the hardware. Changing the  
PSoC device configuration is as simple as adding a new  
component, setting its parameters, and rebuilding the project.  
The following is a sample of the analog components available in  
PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact amount of  
hardware resources (SC/CT blocks, routing, RAM, flash) used  
by a component varies with the features selected in PSoC  
Creator for the component.  
At any stage of development you are free to change the  
hardware configuration and even the target processor. To  
retarget your application (hardware and software) to new  
devices, even from 8- to 32-bit families, just select the new  
device and rebuild.  
„ Amplifiers  
‡ TIA  
‡ PGA  
‡ opamp  
You also have the ability to change the C compiler and evaluate  
an alternative. Components are designed for portability and are  
validated against all devices, from all families, and against all  
supported tool chains. Switching compilers is as easy as editing  
the from the project options and rebuilding the application with  
no errors from the generated APIs or boot code.  
„ ADC  
‡ Delta-Sigma  
„ DACs  
‡ Current  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 39 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 7-2. PSoC Creator Framework  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 40 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
7.1.4.2 Component Catalog  
7.1.4.4 Software Development  
Figure 7-3. Component Catalog  
Figure 7-4. Code Editor  
Anchoring the tool is a modern, highly customizable user  
interface. It includes project management and integrated editors  
for C and assembler source code, as well the design entry tools.  
Project build control leverages compiler technology from top  
commercial vendors such as ARM® Limited, Keil™, and  
CodeSourcery (GNU). Free versions of Keil C51 and GNU C  
Compiler (GCC) for ARM, with no restrictions on code size or end  
product distribution, are included with the tool distribution.  
Upgrading to more optimizing compilers is a snap with support  
for the professional Keil C51 product and ARM RealView™  
compiler.  
The component catalog is a repository of reusable design  
elements that select device functionality and customize your  
PSoC device. It is populated with an impressive selection of  
content; from simple primitives such as logic gates and device  
registers, through the digital timers, counters and PWMs, plus  
analog components such as ADC, DACs, and filters, and  
communication protocols, such as I2C, USB, and CAN. See  
Example Peripherals on page 39 for more details about available  
peripherals. All content is fully characterized and carefully  
documented in data sheets with code examples, AC/DC  
specifications, and user code ready APIs.  
7.1.4.5 Nonintrusive Debugging  
Figure 7-5. PSoC Creator Debugger  
7.1.4.3 Design Reuse  
The symbol editor gives you the ability to develop reusable  
components that can significantly reduce future design time. Just  
draw a symbol and associate that symbol with your proven  
design. PSoC Creator allows for the placement of the new  
symbol anywhere in the component catalog along with the  
content provided by Cypress. You can then reuse your content  
as many times as you want, and in any number of projects,  
without ever having to revisit the details of the implementation.  
With JTAG (4-wire) and SWD (2-wire) debug connectivity  
available on all devices, the PSoC Creator debugger offers full  
control over the target device with minimum intrusion.  
Breakpoints and code execution commands are all readily  
available from toolbar buttons and an impressive lineup of  
windows—register, locals, watch, call stack, memory and  
peripherals—make for an unparalleled level of visibility into the  
system.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 41 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
PSoC Creator contains all the tools necessary to complete a  
design, and then to maintain and extend that design for years to  
come. All steps of the design flow are carefully integrated and  
optimized for ease-of-use and to maximize productivity.  
„ Status and control module – The primary role of this block is to  
provide a way for CPU firmware to interact and synchronize  
with UDB operation.  
„ Clock and reset module – This block provides the UDB clocks  
and reset selection and control.  
7.2 Universal Digital Block  
The universal digital block (UDB) represents an evolutionary  
step to the next generation of PSoC embedded digital peripheral  
functionality. The architecture in first generation PSoC digital  
blocks provides coarse programmability in which a few fixed  
functions with a small number of options are available. The new  
UDB architecture is the optimal balance between configuration  
granularity and efficient implementation. A cornerstone of this  
approach is to provide the ability to customize the devices digital  
operation to match application requirements.  
7.2.1 PLD Module  
The primary purpose of the PLD blocks is to implement logic  
expressions, state machines, sequencers, lookup tables, and  
decoders. In the simplest use model, consider the PLD blocks as  
a standalone resource onto which general purpose RTL is  
synthesized and mapped. The more common and efficient use  
model is to create digital functions from a combination of PLD  
and datapath blocks, where the PLD implements only the  
random logic and state portion of the function while the datapath  
(ALU) implements the more structured elements.  
To achieve this, UDBs consist of a combination of uncommitted  
logic (PLD), structured logic (Datapath), and a flexible routing  
scheme to provide interconnect between these elements, I/O  
connections, and other peripherals. UDB functionality ranges  
from simple self contained functions that are implemented in one  
UDB, or even a portion of a UDB (unused resources are  
available for other functions), to more complex functions that  
require multiple UDBs. Examples of basic functions are timers,  
counters, CRC generators, PWMs, dead band generators, and  
communications functions, such as UARTs, SPI, and I2C. Also,  
the PLD blocks and connectivity provide full featured general  
purpose programmable logic within the limits of the available  
resources.  
Figure 7-7. PLD 12C4 Structure  
IN0  
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
IN5  
IN6  
IN7  
IN8  
IN9  
IN10  
IN11  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
AND  
Array  
Figure 7-6. UDB Block Diagram  
PLD  
Chaining  
SELIN  
(carry in)  
PLD  
12C4  
(8 PTs)  
PLD  
12C4  
(8 PTs)  
Clock  
and Reset  
Control  
OUT0  
OUT1  
OUT2  
OUT3  
MC0  
MC1  
MC2  
MC3  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
Status and  
Control  
Datapath  
Datapath  
Chaining  
SELOUT  
(carry out)  
OR  
Array  
One 12C4 PLD block is shown in Figure 7-7. This PLD has 12  
inputs, which feed across eight product terms. Each product term  
(AND function) can be from 1 to 12 inputs wide, and in a given  
product term, the true (T) or complement (C) of each input can  
be selected. The product terms are summed (OR function) to  
create the PLD outputs. A sum can be from 1 to 8 product terms  
wide. The 'C' in 12C4 indicates that the width of the OR gate (in  
this case 8) is constant across all outputs (rather than variable  
as in a 22V10 device). This PLA like structure gives maximum  
flexibility and insures that all inputs and outputs are permutable  
for ease of allocation by the software tools. There are two 12C4  
PLDs in each UDB.  
Routing Channel  
The main component blocks of the UDB are:  
„ PLD blocks – There are two small PLDs per UDB. Theseblocks  
take inputs from the routing array and form registered or  
combinational sum-of-products logic. PLDs are used to  
implement state machines, state bits, and combinational logic  
equations. PLD configuration is automatically generated from  
graphical primitives.  
„ DatapathmoduleThis8-bitwidedatapathcontainsstructured  
logic to implement a dynamically configurable ALU, a variety  
ofcompare configurations andconditiongeneration. Thisblock  
alsocontainsinput/outputFIFOs, whicharetheprimaryparallel  
data interface between the CPU/DMA system and the UDB.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 42 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
7.2.2 Datapath Module  
The datapath contains an 8-bit single cycle ALU, with associated compare and condition generation logic. This datapath block is  
optimized to implement embedded functions, such as timers, counters, integrators, PWMs, PRS, CRC, shifters and dead band  
generators and many others.  
Figure 7-8. Datapath Top Level  
PHUB System Bus  
R/W Access to All  
Registers  
F1  
FIFOs  
Output  
Muxes  
Input  
Muxes  
F0  
A0  
A1  
D0  
D1  
Input from  
Programmable  
Routing  
Output to  
Programmable  
Routing  
6
6
D1  
Data Registers  
D0  
To/From  
Previous  
Datapath  
To/From  
Next  
Datapath  
Chaining  
A1  
Accumulators  
A0  
PI  
Parallel Input/Output  
(To/From Programmable Routing)  
PO  
ALU  
Shift  
Mask  
7.2.2.1 Working Registers  
7.2.2.2 Dynamic Datapath Configuration RAM  
Dynamic configuration is the ability to change the datapath  
function and internal configuration on a cycle-by-cycle basis,  
under sequencer control. This is implemented using the  
8-word × 16-bit configuration RAM, which stores eight unique  
16-bit wide configurations. The address input to this RAM  
controls the sequence, and can be routed from any block  
connected to the UDB routing matrix, most typically PLD logic,  
I/O pins, or from the outputs of this or other datapath blocks.  
The datapath contains six primary working registers, which are  
accessed by CPU firmware or DMA during normal operation.  
Table 7-1. Working Datapath Registers  
Name  
Function  
Description  
A0 and A1 Accumulators  
These are sources and sinks for  
the ALU and also sources for the  
compares.  
ALU  
D0 and D1 Data Registers These are sources for the ALU  
and sources for the compares.  
The ALU performs eight general purpose functions. They are:  
„ Increment  
„ Decrement  
„ Add  
F0 and F1 FIFOs  
These are the primary interface  
to the system bus. They can be a  
data source for the data registers  
and accumulators or they can  
capture data from the  
„ Subtract  
„ Logical AND  
„ Logical OR  
„ Logical XOR  
accumulatorsorALU. EachFIFO  
is four bytes deep.  
„ Pass, used to pass a value through the ALU to the shift register,  
mask, or another UDB register  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 43 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Independent of the ALU operation, these functions are available:  
7.2.2.8 Time Multiplexing  
In applications that are over sampled, or do not need high clock  
rates, the single ALU block in the datapath can be efficiently  
shared with two sets of registers and condition generators. Carry  
and shift out data from the ALU are registered and can be  
selected as inputs in subsequent cycles. This provides support  
for 16-bit functions in one (8-bit) datapath.  
„ Shift left  
„ Shift right  
„ Nibble swap  
„ Bitwise OR mask  
7.2.2.9 Datapath I/O  
7.2.2.3 Conditionals  
There are six inputs and six outputs that connect the datapath to  
the routing matrix. Inputs from the routing provide the  
configuration for the datapath operation to perform in each cycle,  
and the serial data inputs. Inputs can be routed from other UDB  
blocks, other device peripherals, device I/O pins, and so on. The  
outputs to the routing can be selected from the generated  
conditions, and the serial data outputs. Outputs can be routed to  
other UDB blocks, device peripherals, interrupt and DMA  
controller, I/O pins, and so on.  
Each datapath has two compares, with bit masking options.  
Compare operands include the two accumulators and the two  
data registers in a variety of configurations. Other conditions  
include zero detect, all ones detect, and overflow. These  
conditions are the primary datapath outputs, a selection of which  
can be driven out to the UDB routing matrix. Conditional  
computation can use the built in chaining to neighboring UDBs  
to operate on wider data widths without the need to use routing  
resources.  
7.2.3 Status and Control Module  
7.2.2.4 Variable MSB  
The primary purpose of this circuitry is to coordinate CPU  
firmware interaction with internal UDB operation.  
The most significant bit of an arithmetic and shift function can be  
programmatically specified. This supports variable width CRC  
and PRS functions, and in conjunction with ALU output masking,  
can implement arbitrary width timers, counters and shift blocks.  
Figure 7-10. Status and Control Registers  
System Bus  
7.2.2.5 Built in CRC/PRS  
The datapath has built in support for single cycle CRC  
computation and PRS generation of arbitrary width and arbitrary  
polynomial. CRC/PRS functions longer than 8 bits may be  
implemented in conjunction with PLD logic, or built in chaining  
may be use to extend the function into neighboring UDBs.  
8-bit Status Register  
(Read Only)  
8-bit Control Register  
(Write/Read)  
Routing Channel  
7.2.2.6 Input/Output FIFOs  
Each datapath contains two four-byte deep FIFOs, which can be  
independently configured as an input buffer (system bus writes  
to the FIFO, datapath internal reads the FIFO), or an output  
buffer (datapath internal writes to the FIFO, the system bus reads  
from the FIFO). The FIFOs generate status that are selectable  
as datapath outputs and can therefore be driven to the routing,  
to interact with sequencers, interrupts, or DMA.  
The bits of the control register, which may be written to by the  
system bus, are used to drive into the routing matrix, and thus  
provide firmware with the opportunity to control the state of UDB  
processing. The status register is read-only and it allows internal  
UDB state to be read out onto the system bus directly from  
internal routing. This allows firmware to monitor the state of UDB  
processing. Each bit of these registers has programmable  
connections to the routing matrix and routing connections are  
made depending on the requirements of the application.  
Figure 7-9. Example FIFO Configurations  
System Bus  
System Bus  
7.2.3.1 Usage Examples  
F0  
F0  
F1  
As an example of control input, a bit in the control register can  
be allocated as a function enable bit. There are multiple ways to  
enable a function. In one method the control bit output would be  
routed to the clock control block in one or more UDBs and serve  
as a clock enable for the selected UDB blocks. A status example  
is a case where a PLD or datapath block generated a condition,  
such as a “compare true” condition that is captured and latched  
by the status register and then read (and cleared) by CPU  
firmware.  
D0/D1  
D0  
A0  
D1  
A1  
A0/A1/ALU  
A0/A1/ALU  
F0  
A0/A1/ALU  
F1  
F1  
System Bus  
System Bus  
Dual Capture  
TX/RX  
Dual Buffer  
7.2.3.2 Clock Generation  
Each subcomponent block of a UDB including the two PLDs, the  
datapath, and Status and Control, has a clock selection and  
control block. This promotes a fine granularity with respect to  
allocating clocking resources to UDB component blocks and  
allows unused UDB resources to be used by other functions for  
maximum system efficiency.  
7.2.2.7 Chaining  
The datapath can be configured to chain conditions and signals  
such as carries and shift data with neighboring datapaths to  
create higher precision arithmetic, shift, CRC/PRS functions.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 44 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 7-12. Function Mapping Example in a Bank of UDBs  
7.3 UDB Array Description  
Figure 7-11 shows an example of a 16-UDB array. In addition to  
the array core, there are a DSI routing interfaces at the top and  
bottom of the array. Other interfaces that are not explicitly shown  
include the system interfaces for bus and clock distribution. The  
UDB array includes multiple horizontal and vertical routing  
channels each comprised of 96 wires. The wire connections to  
UDBs, at horizontal/vertical intersection and at the DSI interface  
are highly permutable providing efficient automatic routing in  
PSoC Creator. Additionally the routing allows wire by wire  
segmentation along the vertical and horizontal routing to further  
increase routing flexibility and capability.  
8-Bit  
Timer  
16-Bit  
PWM  
Quadrature Decoder  
16-Bit PYRS  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
UDB  
8-Bit  
UDB  
8-Bit SPI  
UDB  
UDB  
Timer  
Logic  
Figure 7-11. Digital System Interface Structure  
I2C Slave  
UDB  
12-Bit SPI  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
System Connections  
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
Logic  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
UART  
12-Bit PWM  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
7.4 DSI Routing Interface Description  
The DSI routing interface is a continuation of the horizontal and  
vertical routing channels at the top and bottom of the UDB array  
core. It provides general purpose programmable routing  
between device peripherals, including UDBs, I/Os, analog  
peripherals, interrupts, DMA and fixed function peripherals.  
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
Figure 7-13 illustrates the concept of the digital system  
interconnect, which connects the UDB array routing matrix with  
other device peripherals. Any digital core or fixed function  
peripheral that needs programmable routing is connected to this  
interface.  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
Signals in this category include:  
System Connections  
„ Interrupt requests from all digital peripherals in the system.  
„ DMA requests from all digital peripherals in the system.  
„ Digital peripheral data signals that need flexible routing to I/Os.  
„ Digital peripheral data signals that need connections to UDBs.  
„ Connections to the interrupt and DMA controllers.  
„ Connection to I/O pins.  
7.3.1 UDB Array Programmable Resources  
Figure 7-12 shows an example of how functions are mapped into  
a bank of 16 UDBs. The primary programmable resources of the  
UDB are two PLDs, one datapath and one status/control register.  
These resources are allocated independently, because they  
have independently selectable clocks, and therefore unused  
blocks are allocated to other unrelated functions.  
„ Connection to analog system digital signals.  
An example of this is the 8-bit Timer in the upper left corner of  
the array. This function only requires one datapath in the UDB,  
and therefore the PLD resources may be allocated to another  
function. A function such as a Quadrature Decoder may require  
more PLD logic than one UDB can supply and in this case can  
utilize the unused PLD blocks in the 8-bit Timer UDB.  
Programmable resources in the UDB array are generally  
homogeneous so functions can be mapped to arbitrary  
boundaries in the array.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 45 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 7-13. Digital System Interconnect  
7.4.1 I/O Port Routing  
There are a total of 20 DSI routes to a typical 8-bit I/O port, 16  
for data and four for drive strength control.  
Timer  
Counters  
Interrupt  
Controller  
DMA  
Controller  
IO Port  
Pins  
Global  
Clocks  
CAN  
I2C  
When an I/O pin is connected to the routing, there are two  
primary connections available, an input and an output. In  
conjunction with drive strength control, this can implement a  
bidirectional I/O pin. A data output signal has the option to be  
single synchronized (pipelined) and a data input signal has the  
option to be double synchronized. The synchronization clock is  
the system clock (see Figure 6-1 on page 26). Normally all inputs  
from pins are synchronized as this is required if the CPU  
interacts with the signal or any signal derived from it.  
Asynchronous inputs have rare uses. An example of this is a  
feed through of combinational PLD logic from input pins to output  
pins.  
Digital System Routing I/F  
UDB ARRAY  
Figure 7-15. I/O Pin Synchronization Routing  
Digital System Routing I/F  
DO  
DI  
Global  
Clocks  
IO Port  
Pins  
SC/CT  
Blocks  
EMIF  
Del-Sig  
DACs  
Comparators  
Figure 7-16. I/O Pin Output Connectivity  
Interrupt and DMA routing is very flexible in the CY8C36  
8 IO Data Output Connections from the  
UDB Array Digital System Interface  
programmable architecture. In addition to the numerous fixed  
function peripherals that can generate interrupt requests, any  
data signal in the UDB array routing can also be used to generate  
a request. A single peripheral may generate multiple  
independent interrupt requests simplifying system and firmware  
design. Figure 7-14 shows the structure of the IDMUX  
(Interrupt/DMA Multiplexer).  
Figure 7-14. Interrupt and DMA Processing in the IDMUX  
Interrupt and DMA Processing in IDMUX  
Fixed Function IRQs  
0
DO  
PIN 0  
DO  
PIN1  
DO  
PIN2  
DO  
PIN3  
DO  
PIN4  
DO  
PIN5  
DO  
PIN6  
DO  
PIN7  
1
Interrupt  
Controller  
IRQs  
2
3
Port i  
UDB Array  
Edge  
Detect  
There are four more DSI connections to a given I/O port to  
implement dynamic output enable control of pins. This  
connectivity gives a range of options, from fully ganged 8-bits  
controlled by one signal, to up to four individually controlled pins.  
The output enable signal is useful for creating tri-state  
bidirectional pins and buses.  
DRQs  
DMA termout (IRQs)  
0
Fixed Function DRQs  
DMA  
Controller  
1
2
Edge  
Detect  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 46 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 7-17. I/O Pin Output Enable Connectivity  
7.5 CAN  
The CAN peripheral is a fully functional CAN supporting  
communication baud rates up to 1 Mbps. The CAN controller  
implements the CAN2.0A and CAN2.0B specifications as  
defined in the Bosch specification and conforms to the  
ISO-11898-1 standard. The CAN protocol was originally  
designed for automotive applications with a focus on a high level  
of fault detection. This ensures high communication reliability at  
a low cost. Because of its success in automotive applications,  
CAN is used as a standard communication protocol for motion  
oriented machine control networks (CANOpen) and factory  
automation applications (DeviceNet). The CAN controller  
features allow the efficient implementation of higher level  
protocols without affecting the performance of the  
4 IO Control Signal Connections from  
UDB Array Digital System Interface  
OE  
OE  
PIN1  
OE  
PIN2  
OE  
PIN3  
OE  
PIN4  
OE  
PIN5  
OE  
PIN6  
OE  
PIN7  
PIN 0  
microcontroller CPU. Full configuration support is provided in  
PSoC Creator.  
Port i  
Figure 7-18. CAN Bus System Implementation  
CAN Node 1  
PSoC  
CAN Node 2  
CAN Node n  
CAN  
Drivers  
CAN Controller  
En  
Tx Rx  
CAN Transceiver  
CAN_H  
CAN_H  
CAN_L  
CAN_H  
CAN_L  
CAN_L  
CAN Bus  
7.5.1 CAN Features  
„ CAN2.0A/B protocol implementation – ISO 11898 compliant  
‡ Standard and extended frames with up to 8 bytes of data per  
frame  
‡ Message filter capabilities  
‡ Remote Transmission Request (RTR) support  
‡ Programmable bit rate up to 1 Mbps  
„ Receive path  
‡ 16 receive buffers each with its own message filter  
‡ Enhanced hardware message filter implementation that  
covers the ID, IDE, and RTR  
‡ DeviceNet addressing support  
‡ Multiple receive buffers linkable to build a larger receive  
message array  
‡ Automatic transmission request (RTR) response handler  
‡ Lost received message notification  
„ Listen Only mode  
„ SW readable error counter and indicator  
„ Transmit path  
‡ Eight transmit buffers  
‡ Programmable transmit priority  
• Round robin  
• Fixed priority  
‡ Message transmissions abort capability  
„ Sleep mode: Wake the device from sleep with activity on the  
Rx pin  
„ Supports two or three wire interface to external transceiver (Tx,  
Rx, and Enable). The three-wire interface is compatible with  
the Philips PHY; the PHY is not included on-chip. The three  
wires can be routed to any I/O  
7.5.2 Software Tools Support  
„ Enhanced interrupt controller  
‡ CAN receive and transmit buffers status  
‡ CAN controller error status including BusOff  
CAN Controller configuration integrated into PSoC Creator:  
„ CAN Configuration walkthrough with bit timing analyzer  
„ Receive filter setup  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 47 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 7-19. CAN Controller Block Diagram  
TxMessage0  
TxReq  
TxAbort  
TxMessage1  
TxReq  
TxAbort  
Tx Buffer  
Status  
TxReq  
Bit Timing  
Pending  
Priority  
Arbiter  
Tx  
TxMessage6  
TxReq  
Tx  
CAN  
Framer  
CRC  
Generator  
TxInterrupt  
Request  
TxAbort  
(if enabled)  
TxMessage7  
TxReq  
TxAbort  
Error Status  
Error Active  
Error Passive  
Bus Off  
Tx Error Counter  
Rx Error Counter  
RTR RxMessages  
0-15  
Acceptance Code 0  
RxMessage0  
RxMessage1  
Acceptance Mask 0  
Acceptance Mask 1  
Rx Buffer  
Status  
RxMessage  
Available  
Acceptance Code 1  
Rx  
Rx  
RxMessage  
Handler  
CAN  
Framer  
CRC Check  
RxMessage14  
RxMessage15  
Acceptance Mask 14  
Acceptance Mask 15  
Acceptance Code 14  
Acceptance Code 15  
RxInterrupt  
Request  
(if enabled)  
WakeUp  
Request  
Error Detection  
CRC  
Form  
ACK  
Bit Stuffing  
Bit Error  
Overload  
Arbitration  
ErrInterrupt  
Request  
(if enabled)  
„ Internal 48-MHz main oscillator mode that auto locks to USB  
bus clock, requiring no external crystal for USB (USB equipped  
parts only)  
7.6 USB  
PSoC includes a dedicated Full-Speed (12 Mbps) USB 2.0  
transceiver supporting all four USB transfer types: control,  
interrupt, bulk, and isochronous. PSoC Creator provides full  
configuration support. USB interfaces to hosts through two  
dedicated USBIO pins, which are detailed in the “I/O System and  
Routing” section on page 32.  
„ Interrupts on bus and each endpoint event, with device wakeup  
„ USB reset, suspend, and resume operations  
„ Bus-powered and self-powered modes  
Figure 7-20. USB  
USB includes the following features:  
„ Eight unidirectional data endpoints  
„ One bidirectional control endpoint 0 (EP0)  
„ Shared 512-byte buffer for the eight data endpoints  
„ Dedicated 8-byte buffer for EP0  
512 X 8  
Arbiter  
SRAM  
External 22 Ω  
Resistors  
D+  
S I E  
(Serial Interface  
Engine)  
„ Three memory modes  
‡ Manual Memory Management with No DMA Access  
‡ Manual Memory Management with Manual DMA Access  
‡ Automatic Memory Management with Automatic DMA  
Access  
USB  
I/O  
D–  
Interrupts  
48 MHz  
IMO  
„ Internal 3.3-V regulator for transceiver  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 48 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
2
7.7 Timers, Counters, and PWMs  
7.8 I C  
The Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral is a 16-bit dedicated  
peripheral providing three of the most common embedded  
peripheral features. As almost all embedded systems use some  
combination of timers, counters, and PWMs. Four of them have  
been included on this PSoC device family. Additional and more  
advanced functionality timers, counters, and PWMs can also be  
instantiated in Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs) as required.  
PSoC Creator allows you to choose the timer, counter, and PWM  
features that they require. The tool set utilizes the most optimal  
resources available.  
The I2C peripheral provides a synchronous two wire interface  
designed to interface the PSoC device with a two wire I2C serial  
communication bus. The bus is compliant with Philips ‘The I2C  
Specification’ version 2.1. Additional I2C interfaces can be  
instantiated using Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs) in PSoC  
Creator, as required.  
To eliminate the need for excessive CPU intervention and  
overhead, I2C specific support is provided for status detection  
and generation of framing bits. I2C operates as a slave, a master,  
or multimaster (Slave and Master). In slave mode, the unit  
always listens for a start condition to begin sending or receiving  
data. Master mode supplies the ability to generate the Start and  
Stop conditions and initiate transactions. Multimaster mode  
provides clock synchronization and arbitration to allow multiple  
masters on the same bus. If Master mode is enabled and Slave  
mode is not enabled, the block does not generate interrupts on  
externally generated Start conditions. I2C interfaces through DSI  
routing and allows direct connections to any GPIO or SIO pins.  
I2C provides hardware address detect of a 7-bit address without  
CPU intervention. Additionally the device can wake from  
low-power modes on a 7-bit hardware address match. If wakeup  
functionality is required, I2C pin connections are limited to the  
two special sets of SIO pins.  
The Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral can select from multiple  
clock sources, with input and output signals connected through  
the DSI routing. DSI routing allows input and output connections  
to any device pin and any internal digital signal accessible  
through the DSI. Each of the four instances has a compare  
output, terminal count output (optional complementary compare  
output), and programmable interrupt request line. The  
Timer/Counter/PWMs are configurable as freerunning, one shot,  
or Enable input controlled. The peripheral has timer reset and  
capture inputs, and a kill input for control of the comparator  
outputs. The peripheral supports full 16-bit capture.  
Timer/Counter/PWM features include:  
„ 16-bit Timer/Counter/PWM (down count only)  
„ Selectable clock source  
I2C features include:  
„ Slave and master, transmitter, and receiver operation  
„ Byte processing for low CPU overhead  
„ Interrupt or polling CPU interface  
„ PWM comparator (configurable for LT, LTE, EQ, GTE, GT)  
„ Period reload on start, reset, and terminal count  
„ Interrupt on terminal count, compare true, or capture  
„ Dynamic counter reads  
„ Support for bus speeds up to 1 Mbps (3.4 Mbps in UDBs)  
„ 7 or 10-bit addressing (10-bit addressing requires firmware  
support)  
„ Timer capture mode  
„ Count while enable signal is asserted mode  
„ Free run mode  
„ SMBus operation (through firmware support – SMBus  
supported in hardware in UDBs)  
„ One Shot mode (stop at end of period)  
„ Complementary PWM outputs with deadband  
„ PWM output kill  
„ 7-bit hardware address compare  
„ Wake from low-power modes on address match  
Data transfers follow the format shown in Figure 7-22. After the  
START condition (S), a slave address is sent. This address is 7  
bits long followed by an eighth bit which is a data direction bit  
(R/W) - a 'zero' indicates a transmission (WRITE), a 'one'  
indicates a request for data (READ). A data transfer is always  
terminated by a STOP condition (P) generated by the master.  
However, if a master still wishes to communicate on the bus, it  
can generate a repeated START condition (Sr) and address  
another slave without first generating a STOP condition. Various  
combinations of read/write formats are then possible within such  
a transfer.  
Figure 7-21. Timer/Counter/PWM  
Clock  
Reset  
Enable  
Capture  
Kill  
IRQ  
Timer / Counter /  
PWM 16-bit  
TC / Compare!  
Compare  
Figure 7-22. I2C Complete Transfer Timing  
SDA  
SCL  
8
9
1 - 7  
8
9
1 - 7  
8
9
1 - 7  
START  
Condition  
STOP  
Condition  
ADDRESS  
R/W  
ACK  
DATA  
ACK  
DATA  
ACK  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 49 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
The DFB processes this data and passes the result to another  
on chip resource such as a DAC or main memory through DMA  
on the system bus.  
7.9 Digital Filter Block  
Some devices in the CY8C36 family of devices have a dedicated  
HW accelerator block used for digital filtering. The DFB has a  
dedicated multiplier and accumulator that calculates a 24-bit by  
24-bit multiply accumulate in one system clock cycle. This  
enables the mapping of a direct form FIR filter that approaches  
a computation rate of one FIR tap for each clock cycle. The MCU  
can implement any of the functions performed by this block, but  
at a slower rate that consumes MCU bandwidth.  
Data movement in or out of the DFB is typically controlled by the  
system DMA controller but can be moved directly by the MCU.  
8. Analog Subsystem  
The analog programmable system creates application specific  
combinations of both standard and advanced analog signal  
processing blocks. These blocks are then interconnected to  
each other and also to any pin on the device, providing a high  
level of design flexibility and IP security. The features of the  
analog subsystem are outlined here to provide an overview of  
capabilities and architecture.  
The PSoC Creator interface provides a wizard to implement FIR  
and IIR digital filters with coefficients for LPF, BPF, HPF, Notch  
and arbitrary shape filters. 64 pairs of data and coefficients are  
stored. This enables a 64 tap FIR filter or up to 4 16 tap filters of  
either FIR or IIR formulation.  
„ Flexible, configurable analog routing architecture provided by  
analog globals, analog mux bus, and analog local buses.  
Figure 7-23. DFB Application Diagram (pwr/gnd not shown)  
„ High resolution Delta-Sigma ADC.  
BUSCLK  
read_data  
write_data  
„ Up to four 8-bit DACs that provide either voltage or current  
output.  
Data  
Source  
(PHUB)  
„ Fourcomparatorswithoptional connectiontoconfigurableLUT  
outputs.  
System  
Bus  
addr  
Digital  
Routing  
Digital Filter  
Block  
Data  
Dest  
(PHUB)  
„ Up to four configurable switched capacitor/continuous time  
(SC/CT) blocks for functions that include opamp, unity gain  
buffer, programmablegainamplifier, transimpedanceamplifier,  
and mixer.  
DMA  
Request  
DMA  
CTRL  
„ Up to four opamps for internal use and connection to GPIO that  
can be used as high current output buffers.  
„ CapSense subsystem to enable capacitive touch sensing.  
The typical use model is for data to be supplied to the DFB over  
the system bus from another on-chip system data source such  
as an ADC. The data typically passes through main memory or  
is directly transferred from another chip resource through DMA.  
„ Precision reference for generating an accurate analog voltage  
for internal analog blocks.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 50 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 8-1. Analog Subsystem Block Diagram  
DAC  
DAC  
DAC  
Precision  
Reference  
A
N
A
L
O
G
A
N
A
L
O
G
DAC  
SC/CT Block  
SC/CT Block  
SC/CT Block  
GPIO  
Port  
GPIO  
Port  
SC/CT Block  
R
O
U
T
I
R
O
U
T
I
Comparators  
CMP CMP  
N
G
N
G
CMP  
CMP  
CapSense Subsystem  
Config&  
Status  
Registers  
Analog  
Interface  
PHUB  
CPU  
DSI  
Array  
Clock  
Distribution  
Decimator  
The PSoC Creator software program provides a user friendly  
interface to configure the analog connections between the GPIO  
and various analog resources and connections from one analog  
resource to another. PSoC Creator also provides component  
libraries that allow you to configure the various analog blocks to  
perform application specific functions (PGA, transimpedance  
amplifier, voltage DAC, current DAC, and so on). The tool also  
generates API interface libraries that allow you to write firmware  
that allows the communication between the analog peripheral  
and CPU/Memory.  
„ Eight analog local buses (abus) to route signals between the  
different analog blocks  
„ Multiplexers and switches for input and output selection of the  
analog blocks  
8.1.2 Functional Description  
Analog globals (AGs) and analog mux buses (AMUXBUS)  
provide analog connectivity between GPIOs and the various  
analog blocks. There are 16 AGs in the CY8C36 family. The  
analog routing architecture is divided into four quadrants as  
shown in Figure 8-2. Each quadrant has four analog globals  
(AGL[0..3], AGL[4..7], AGR[0..3], AGR[4..7]). Each GPIO is  
connected to the corresponding AG through an analog switch.  
The analog mux bus is a shared routing resource that connects  
to every GPIO through an analog switch. There are two  
AMUXBUS routes in CY8C36, one in the left half (AMUXBUSL)  
and one in the right half (AMUXBUSR), as shown in Figure 8-2.  
8.1 Analog Routing  
The CY8C36 family of devices has a flexible analog routing  
architecture that provides the capability to connect GPIOs and  
different analog blocks, and also route signals between different  
analog blocks. One of the strong points of this flexible routing  
architecture is that it allows dynamic routing of input and output  
connections to the different analog blocks.  
For information on how to make pin selections for optimal analog  
routing, refer to the application note, AN58304 - PSoC® 3 and  
PSoC® 5 - Pin Selection for Analog Designs.  
8.1.1 Features  
„ Flexible, configurable analog routing architecture  
„ 16 analog globals (AG) and two analog mux buses  
(AMUXBUS) to connect GPIOs and the analog blocks  
„ Each GPIO is connected to one analog global and one analog  
mux bus  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 51 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 8-2. CY8C36 Analog Interconnect  
*
*
*
*
*
swinp  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
swinn  
*
*
AMUXBUSR  
AMUXBUSL  
AGL[4]  
AGL[5]  
AGL[6]  
AGL[7]  
AGR[4]  
AGR[5]  
AGR[6]  
AGR[7]  
ExVrefL  
ExVrefL1  
ExVrefL2  
44  
swinp  
swinn  
GPIO  
P3[5]  
GPIO  
P3[4]  
GPIO  
P3[3]  
GPIO  
P3[2]  
GPIO  
P3[1]  
GPIO  
P3[0]  
GPXT  
opamp1  
swfol  
opamp3  
swfol  
opamp0  
swfol  
opamp2  
swfol  
swinp  
swinn  
0123  
3210  
76543210  
01234567  
GPIO  
P0[4]  
GPIO  
P0[5]  
GPIO  
P0[6]  
GPIO  
swinp  
swinn  
LPF  
swout  
swout  
in0  
in1  
abuf_vref_int  
(1.024V)  
abuf_vref_int  
(1.024V)  
i0  
i2  
*
5
ExVrefR  
swin  
swin  
out0  
out1  
comp0  
comp1  
+
-
+
-
*
P0[7]  
i3  
i1  
COMPARATOR  
cmp0_vref  
(1.024V)  
cmp0_vref  
(1.024V)  
+
-
+
-
GPIO  
P4[2]  
GPIO  
P4[3]  
GPIO  
cmp_muxvn[1:0]  
vref_cmp1  
bg_v(d0a._2re5s6_eVn)  
comp2  
90 comp3  
cmp1_vref  
*
P15[1]  
GPXT  
P15[0]  
bg_vda_swabusl0  
Vdda  
Vdda/2  
out  
ref  
in  
out  
ref  
in  
refbuf_vref1 (1.024V)  
CAPSENSE  
refbufl  
refbuf_vref1 (1.024V)  
refbuf_vref2 (1.2V)  
*
refbuf_vref2 (1.2V)  
refbufr  
refsel[1:0]  
refsel[1:0]  
P4[4]  
GPIO  
P4[5]  
GPIO  
P4[6]  
GPIO  
P4[7]  
vssa  
Vssa  
sc0  
Vin  
Vref  
out  
sc1  
Vin  
Vref  
sc2_bgref  
(1.024V)  
sc0_bgref  
(1.024V)  
*
out  
sc1_bgref  
(1.024V)  
sc3_bgref  
(1.024V)  
Vccd  
SC/CT  
Vin  
Vref  
out  
sc2  
Vin  
Vref  
out  
sc3  
*
Vssd  
*
104  
*
Vccd  
Vddd  
*
Vssd  
ABUSL0  
ABUSL1  
ABUSL2  
ABUSL3  
ABUSR0  
ABUSR1  
ABUSR2  
ABUSR3  
*
Vddd  
GPIO  
P6[0]  
GPIO  
v0  
i0  
v1  
DAC1  
i1  
USB IO  
DAC0  
*
P15[7]  
VIDAC  
USB IO  
v2  
i2  
36  
v3  
DAC3  
i3  
*
DAC2  
P15[6]  
GPIO  
P6[1]  
GPIO  
P6[2]  
GPIO  
P6[3]  
GPIO  
P15[4]  
GPIO  
P15[5]  
GPIO  
P2[0]  
GPIO  
P2[1]  
GPIO  
P2[2]  
GPIO  
dac_vref (0.256V)  
P5[7]  
GPIO  
P5[6]  
GPIO  
P5[5]  
GPIO  
P5[4]  
SIO  
P12[7]  
SIO  
P12[6]  
GPIO  
vcmsel[1:0]  
en_resvpwra  
+
DSM0  
vpwra  
vpwra/2  
dsm0_vcm_vref1  
(0.8V)  
DSM  
refs  
-
vssa  
28  
vcm  
qtz_ref  
vref_vss_ext  
dsm0_vcm_vref2 (0.7V)  
dsm0_qtz_vref2 (1.2V)  
dsm0_qtz_vref1 (1.024V)  
Vdda  
Vdda/4  
ExVrefL  
ExVrefR  
refmux[2:0]  
en_resvda  
CY8C55 only  
*
P1[7]  
GPIO  
AMUXBUSL  
AMUXBUSR  
76543210  
0123  
ANALOG  
BUS  
*
P1[6]  
01234567  
3210  
ANALOG  
ANALOG ANALOG  
BUS GLOBALS  
*
P2[3]  
GPIO  
P2[4]  
GLOBALS  
*
VBE  
TS  
ADC  
*
:
Vss ref  
Vddio2  
LPF  
AGR[3]  
AGR[2]  
AGL[3]  
AGL[2]  
AGR[1]  
AGL[1]  
AGR[0]  
AGL[0]  
AMUXBUSR  
AMUXBUSL  
*
*
*
*
*
13  
Mux Group  
Switch Group  
*
*
*
Connection  
*
*
*
*
*
Switch Resistance  
Notes:  
Small ( ~870 Ohms )  
Large ( ~200 Ohms)  
* Denotes pins on all packages  
LCD signals are not shown.  
Rev #51  
2-April-2010  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 52 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Analog local buses (abus) are routing resources located within  
the analog subsystem and are used to route signals between  
different analog blocks. There are eight abus routes in CY8C36,  
four in the left half (abusl [0:3]) and four in the right half (abusr  
[0:3]) as shown in Figure 8-2. Using the abus saves the analog  
globals and analog mux buses from being used for  
actual analog to digital conversion. The modulator over-samples  
the input and generates a serial data stream output. This high  
speed data stream is not useful for most applications without  
some type of post processing, and so is passed to the decimator  
through the Analog Interface block. The decimator converts the  
high speed serial data stream into parallel ADC results. The  
modulator/decimator frequency response is [(sin x)/x]4; a typical  
frequency response is shown in Figure 8-5.  
interconnecting the analog blocks.  
Multiplexers and switches exist on the various buses to direct  
signals into and out of the analog blocks. A multiplexer can have  
only one connection on at a time, whereas a switch can have  
multiple connections on simultaneously. In Figure 8-2,  
multiplexers are indicated by grayed ovals and switches are  
indicated by transparent ovals.  
Figure 8-4. Delta-sigma ADC Block Diagram  
Positive  
Input Mux  
Delta  
Sigma  
Modulator  
Input  
Buffer  
12 to 20 Bit  
Result  
Decimator  
SOC  
(Analog Routing)  
8.2 Delta-sigma ADC  
Negative  
EOC  
Input Mux  
The CY8C36 device contains one delta-sigma ADC. This ADC  
offers differential input, high resolution and excellent linearity,  
making it a good ADC choice for measurement applications. The  
converter can be configured to output 12-bit resolution at data  
rates of up to 192 ksps. At a fixed clock rate, resolution can be  
traded for faster data rates as shown in Table 8-1 and Figure 8-3.  
Figure 8-5. Delta-sigma ADC Frequency Response,  
Normalized to Output, Sample Rate = 48 kHz  
Table 8-1. Delta-sigma ADC Performance  
MaximumSampleRate  
0
-10  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-50  
-60  
-70  
-80  
-90  
-100  
Bits  
SINAD (dB)  
(sps)  
192 k  
384 k  
12  
8
66  
43  
Figure8-3. Delta-sigmaADCSampleRates, Range=±1.024 V  
1,000,000  
100  
1,000  
10,000  
100,000  
1,000,000  
100,000  
10,000  
1,000  
Input frequency,Hz  
Resolution and sample rate are controlled by the Decimator.  
Data is pipelined in the decimator; the output is a function of the  
last four samples. When the input multiplexer is switched, the  
output data is not valid until after the fourth sample after the  
switch.  
8.2.2 Operational Modes  
Continuous  
The ADC can be configured by the user to operate in one of four  
modes: Single Sample, Multi Sample, Continuous, or Multi  
Sample (Turbo). All four modes are started by either a write to  
the start bit in a control register or an assertion of the Start of  
Conversion (SoC) signal. When the conversion is complete, a  
status bit is set and the output signal End of Conversion (EoC)  
asserts high and remains high until the value is read by either the  
DMA controller or the CPU.  
Multi-Sample  
100  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
Resolution, bits  
8.2.1 Functional Description  
8.2.2.1 Single Sample  
The ADC connects and configures three basic components,  
input buffer, delta-sigma modulator, and decimator. The basic  
block diagram is shown in Figure 8-4. The signal from the input  
muxes is delivered to the delta-sigma modulator either directly or  
through the input buffer. The delta-sigma modulator performs the  
In Single Sample mode, the ADC performs one sample  
conversion on a trigger. In this mode, the ADC stays in standby  
state waiting for the SoC signal to be asserted. When SoC is  
signaled the ADC performs four successive conversions. The  
first three conversions prime the decimator. The ADC result is  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 53 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
valid and available after the fourth conversion, at which time the  
EoC signal is generated. To detect the end of conversion, the  
system may poll a control register for status or configure the  
external EoC signal to generate an interrupt or invoke a DMA  
request. When the transfer is done the ADC reenters the standby  
state where it stays until another SoC event.  
hardware. This signal is optional and does not need to be  
connected if ADC is running in a continuous mode.  
8.2.4 End of Conversion Output  
The EoC signal goes high at the end of each ADC conversion.  
This signal may be used to trigger either an interrupt or DMA  
request.  
8.2.2.2 Continuous  
Continuous sample mode is used to take multiple successive  
samples of a single input signal. Multiplexing multiple inputs  
should not be done with this mode. There is a latency of three  
conversion times before the first conversion result is available.  
This is the time required to prime the decimator. After the first  
result, successive conversions are available at the selected  
sample rate.  
8.3 Comparators  
The CY8C36 family of devices contains four comparators in a  
device. Comparators have these features:  
„ Input offset factory trimmed to less than 5 mV  
„ Rail-to-rail common mode input range (VSSA to VDDA  
)
„ Speed and power can be traded off by using one of three  
modes: fast, slow, or ultra low-power  
8.2.2.3 Multi Sample  
Multi sample mode is similar to continuous mode except that the  
ADC is reset between samples. This mode is useful when the  
input is switched between multiple signals. The decimator is  
re-primed between each sample so that previous samples do not  
affect the current conversion. Upon completion of a sample, the  
next sample is automatically initiated. The results can be  
transferred using either firmware polling, interrupt, or DMA.  
„ Comparator outputs can be routed to lookup tables to perform  
simple logic functions and then can also be routed to digital  
blocks  
„ The positive input ofthe comparators may be optionally passed  
through a low pass filter. Two filters are provided  
„ Comparator inputs can be connections to GPIO, DAC outputs  
and SC block outputs  
More information on output formats is provided in the Technical  
Reference Manual.  
8.3.1 Input and Output Interface  
The positive and negative inputs to the comparators come from  
the analog global buses, the analog mux line, the analog local  
bus and precision reference through multiplexers. The output  
from each comparator could be routed to any of the two input  
LUTs. The output of that LUT is routed to the UDB Digital System  
Interface.  
8.2.3 Start of Conversion Input  
The SoC signal is used to start an ADC conversion. A digital  
clock or UDB output can be used to drive this input. It can be  
used when the sampling period must be longer than the ADC  
conversion time or when the ADC must be synchronized to other  
Figure 8-6. Analog Comparator  
ANAIF  
From  
Analog  
Routing  
+
comp0  
_
+
_
From  
Analog  
Routing  
comp1  
From  
Analog  
Routing  
+
comp3  
_
+
From  
Analog  
Routing  
comp2  
_
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
LUT0  
LUT1  
LUT2  
LUT3  
UDBs  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 54 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
8.3.2 LUT  
Figure 8-8. Opamp Configurations  
The CY8C36 family of devices contains four LUTs. The LUT is a  
two input, one output lookup table that is driven by any one or  
two of the comparators in the chip. The output of any LUT is  
routed to the digital system interface of the UDB array. From the  
digital system interface of the UDB array, these signals can be  
connected to UDBs, DMA controller, I/O, or the interrupt  
controller.  
a) Voltage Follower  
Opamp  
Vout to Pin  
Vin  
The LUT control word written to a register sets the logic function  
on the output. The available LUT functions and the associated  
control word is shown in Table 8-2.  
b) External Uncommitted  
Opamp  
Table 8-2. LUT Function vs. Program Word and Inputs  
Control Word  
0000b  
0001b  
0010b  
0011b  
0100b  
0101b  
0110b  
0111b  
Output (A and B are LUT inputs)  
FALSE (‘0’)  
A AND B  
Vout to GPIO  
Opamp  
A AND (NOT B)  
A
(NOT A) AND B  
B
Vp to GPIO  
Vn to GPIO  
A XOR B  
A OR B  
c) Internal Uncommitted  
Opamp  
1000b  
1001b  
1010b  
1011b  
1100b  
1101b  
1110b  
A NOR B  
A XNOR B  
NOT B  
Vn  
A OR (NOT B)  
NOT A  
To Internal Signals  
Vout to Pin  
GPIO Pin  
Opamp  
(NOT A) OR B  
A NAND B  
TRUE (‘1’)  
Vp  
1111b  
8.4 Opamps  
The opamp has three speed modes, slow, medium, and fast. The  
slow mode consumes the least amount of quiescent power and  
the fast mode consumes the most power. The inputs are able to  
swing rail-to-rail. The output swing is capable of rail-to-rail  
operation at low current output, within 50 mV of the rails. When  
driving high current loads (about 25 mA) the output voltage may  
only get within 500 mV of the rails.  
The CY8C36 family of devices contain up to four general  
purpose opamps in a device.  
Figure 8-7. Opamp  
GPIO  
8.5 Programmable SC/CT Blocks  
Analog  
Global Bus  
The CY8C36 family of devices contains up to four switched  
capacitor/continuous time (SC/CT) blocks in a device. Each  
switched capacitor/continuous time block is built around a single  
rail-to-rail high bandwidth opamp.  
Opamp  
Analog  
Global Bus  
GPIO  
VREF  
Analog  
Internal Bus  
Switched capacitor is a circuit design technique that uses  
capacitors plus switches instead of resistors to create analog  
functions. These circuits work by moving charge between  
capacitors by opening and closing different switches.  
Nonoverlapping in phase clock signals control the switches, so  
that not all switches are ON simultaneously.  
=
Analog Switch  
GPIO  
The opamp is uncommitted and can be configured as a gain  
stage or voltage follower, or output buffer on external or internal  
signals.  
The PSoC Creator tool offers a user friendly interface, which  
allows you to easily program the SC/CT blocks. Switch control  
and clock phase control configuration is done by PSoC Creator  
so users only need to determine the application use parameters  
such as gain, amplifier polarity, VREF connection, and so on.  
See Figure 8-8. In any configuration, the input and output signals  
can all be connected to the internal global signals and monitored  
with an ADC, or comparator. The configurations are  
implemented with switches between the signals and GPIO pins.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 55 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
The same opamps and block interfaces are also connectable to  
an array of resistors which allows the construction of a variety of  
continuous time functions.  
The PGA is used in applications where the input signal may not  
be large enough to achieve the desired resolution in the ADC, or  
dynamic range of another SC/CT block such as a mixer. The gain  
is adjustable at runtime, including changing the gain of the PGA  
prior to each ADC sample.  
The opamp and resistor array is programmable to perform  
various analog functions including  
„ Naked operational amplifier – Continuous mode  
„ Unity-gain buffer – Continuous mode  
8.5.4 TIA  
The Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) converts an internal or  
external current to an output voltage. The TIA uses an internal  
feedback resistor in a continuous time configuration to convert  
input current to output voltage. For an input current Iin, the output  
voltage is Iin × Rfb +VREF, where VREF is the value placed on the  
non inverting input. The feedback resistor Rfb is programmable  
between 20 KΩ and 1 MΩ through a configuration register.  
Table 8-4 shows the possible values of Rfb and associated  
configuration settings.  
„ Programmable gain amplifier (PGA) – Continuous mode  
„ Transimpedance amplifier (TIA) – Continuous mode  
„ Up/down mixer – Continuous mode  
„ Sample and hold mixer (NRZ S/H) – Switched cap mode  
„ First order analog to digital modulator – Switched cap mode  
8.5.1 Naked Opamp  
The Naked Opamp presents both inputs and the output for  
connection to internal or external signals. The opamp has a unity  
gain bandwidth greater than 6.0 MHz and output drive current up  
to 650 µA. This is sufficient for buffering internal signals (such as  
DAC outputs) and driving external loads greater than 7.5 kΩ.  
Table 8-4. Feedback Resistor Settings  
Configuration Word  
Nominal Rfb (KΩ)  
000b  
001b  
010b  
011b  
100b  
101b  
110b  
111b  
20  
30  
8.5.2 Unity Gain  
40  
The Unity Gain buffer is a Naked Opamp with the output directly  
connected to the inverting input for a gain of 1.00. It has a –3 dB  
bandwidth greater than 6.0 MHz.  
60  
120  
250  
500  
1000  
8.5.3 PGA  
The PGA amplifies an external or internal signal. The PGA can  
be configured to operate in inverting mode or noninverting mode.  
The PGA function may be configured for both positive and  
negative gains as high as 50 and 49 respectively. The gain is  
adjusted by changing the values of R1 and R2 as illustrated in  
Figure 8-9 on page 56. The schematic in Figure 8-9 on page 56  
shows the configuration and possible resistor settings for the  
PGA. The gain is switched from inverting and non inverting by  
changing the shared select value of the both the input muxes.  
The bandwidth for each gain case is listed in Table 8-3.  
Figure 8-10. Continuous Time TIA Schematic  
R
fb  
I
in  
Table 8-3. Bandwidth  
V
out  
V
ref  
Gain  
1
Bandwidth  
6.0 MHz  
340 kHz  
220 kHz  
215 kHz  
24  
48  
50  
The TIA configuration is used for applications where an external  
sensor's output is current as a function of some type of stimulus  
such as temperature, light, magnetic flux etc. In a common  
application, the voltage DAC output can be connected to the  
VREF TIA input to allow calibration of the external sensor bias  
current by adjusting the voltage DAC output voltage.  
Figure 8-9. PGA Resistor Settings  
R1  
R2  
Vin  
0
1
8.6 LCD Direct Drive  
The PSoC Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) driver system is a highly  
configurable peripheral designed to allow PSoC to directly drive  
a broad range of LCD glass. All voltages are generated on chip,  
eliminating the need for external components. With a high  
multiplex ratio of up to 1/16, the CY8C36 family LCD driver  
system can drive a maximum of 736 segments. The PSoC LCD  
driver module was also designed with the conservative power  
budget of portable devices in mind, enabling different LCD drive  
modes and power down modes to conserve power.  
Vref  
20 k or 40 k  
20 k to 980 k  
S
Vref  
Vin  
0
1
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 56 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
PSoC Creator provides an LCD segment drive component. The  
component wizard provides easy and flexible configuration of  
LCD resources. You can specify pins for segments and  
commons along with other options. The software configures the  
device to meet the required specifications. This is possible  
because of the programmability inherent to PSoC devices.  
8.6.2 Display Data Flow  
The LCD segment driver system reads display data and  
generates the proper output voltages to the LCD glass to  
produce the desired image. Display data resides in a memory  
buffer in the system SRAM. Each time you need to change the  
common and segment driver voltages, the next set of pixel data  
moves from the memory buffer into the Port Data Registers  
through DMA.  
Key features of the PSoC LCD segment system are:  
„ LCD panel direct driving  
8.6.3 UDB and LCD Segment Control  
„ Type A (standard) and Type B (low-power) waveform support  
A UDB is configured to generate the global LCD control signals  
and clocking. This set of signals is routed to each LCD pin driver  
through a set of dedicated LCD global routing channels. In  
addition to generating the global LCD control signals, the UDB  
also produces a DMA request to initiate the transfer of the next  
frame of LCD data.  
„ Wide operating voltage range support (2 V to 5 V) for LCD  
panels  
„ Static, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5 bias voltage levels  
„ Internal biasvoltage generationthrough internal resistorladder  
„ Up to 62 total common and segment outputs  
8.6.4 LCD DAC  
„ Up to 1/16 multiplex for a maximum of 16 backplane/common  
outputs  
The LCD DAC generates the contrast control and bias voltage  
for the LCD system. The LCD DAC produces up to five LCD drive  
voltages plus ground, based on the selected bias ratio. The bias  
voltages are driven out to GPIO pins on a dedicated LCD bias  
bus, as required.  
„ Up to 62 front plane/segment outputs for direct drive  
„ Drives upto 736 total segments (16 backplane× 46 front plane)  
„ Up to 64 levels of software controlled contrast  
8.7 CapSense  
„ Ability to move display data from memory buffer to LCD driver  
through DMA (without CPU intervention)  
The CapSense system provides a versatile and efficient means  
for measuring capacitance in applications such as touch sense  
buttons, sliders, proximity detection, etc. The CapSense system  
uses a configuration of system resources, including a few  
hardware functions primarily targeted for CapSense. Specific  
resource usage is detailed in the CapSense component in PSoC  
Creator.  
„ Adjustable LCD refresh rate from 10 Hz to 150 Hz  
„ Ability to invert LCD display for negative image  
„ Three LCD driver drive modes, allowing power optimization  
Figure 8-11. LCD System  
A capacitive sensing method using a Delta-Sigma Modulator  
(CSD) is used. It provides capacitance sensing using a switched  
capacitor technique with a delta-sigma modulator to convert the  
sensing current to a digital code.  
LCD  
Global  
DAC  
Clock  
8.8 Temp Sensor  
Die temperature is used to establish programming parameters  
for writing flash. Die temperature is measured using a dedicated  
sensor based on a forward biased transistor. The temperature  
sensor has its own auxiliary ADC.  
UDB  
PIN  
LCD Driver  
Block  
Display  
DMA  
RAM  
8.9 DAC  
The CY8C36 parts contain up to four Digital to Analog  
Convertors (DACs). Each DAC is 8-bit and can be configured for  
either voltage or current output. The DACs support CapSense,  
power supply regulation, and waveform generation. Each DAC  
has the following features:  
PHUB  
„ Adjustable voltage or current output in 255 steps  
„ Programmable step size (range selection)  
„ Eight bits of calibration to correct ± 25% of gain error  
„ Source and sink option for current output  
„ 8 Msps conversion rate for current output  
„ 1 Msps conversion rate for voltage output  
„ Monotonic in nature  
8.6.1 LCD Segment Pin Driver  
Each GPIO pin contains an LCD driver circuit. The LCD driver  
buffers the appropriate output of the LCD DAC to directly drive  
the glass of the LCD. A register setting determines whether the  
pin is a common or segment. The pin’s LCD driver then selects  
one of the six bias voltages to drive the I/O pin, as appropriate  
for the display data.  
„ Data and strobe inputs can be provided by the CPU or DMA,  
or routed directly from the DSI  
„ Dedicated low-resistance output pin for high-current mode  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 57 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 8-12. DAC Block Diagram  
I
Range  
source  
1x,8x, 64x  
Vout  
Iout  
Reference  
Source  
Scaler  
R
3R  
I sink Range  
1x,8x, 64x  
8.9.1 Current DAC  
Figure 8-13. Mixer Configuration  
The current DAC (IDAC) can be configured for the ranges 0 to  
32 µA, 0 to 256 µA, and 0 to 2.048 mA. The IDAC can be  
configured to source or sink current.  
C2 = 1.7 pF  
C1 = 850 fF  
8.9.2 Voltage DAC  
Rmix 0 20 k or 40 k  
For the voltage DAC (VDAC), the current DAC output is routed  
through resistors. The two ranges available for the VDAC are 0  
to 1.024 V and 0 to 4.096 V. In voltage mode any load connected  
to the output of a DAC should be purely capacitive (the output of  
the VDAC is not buffered).  
sc_clk  
Rmix 0 20 k or 40 k  
Vin  
Vout  
0
1
8.10 Up/Down Mixer  
Vref  
In continuous time mode, the SC/CT block components are used  
to build an up or down mixer. Any mixing application contains an  
input signal frequency and a local oscillator frequency. The  
polarity of the clock, Fclk, switches the amplifier between  
inverting or noninverting gain. The output is the product of the  
input and the switching function from the local oscillator, with  
frequency components at the local oscillator plus and minus the  
signal frequency (Fclk + Fin and Fclk – Fin) and reduced-level  
frequency components at odd integer multiples of the local  
oscillator frequency. The local oscillator frequency is provided by  
the selected clock source for the mixer.  
sc_clk  
8.11 Sample and Hold  
The main application for a sample and hold, is to hold a value  
stable while an ADC is performing a conversion. Some  
applications require multiple signals to be sampled  
simultaneously, such as for power calculations (V and I).  
Figure 8-14. Sample and Hold Topology  
(Φ1 and Φ2 are opposite phases of a clock)  
Continuous time up and down mixing works for applications with  
input signals and local oscillator frequencies up to 1 MHz.  
Φ1  
Φ 2  
Φ1  
Φ2  
C1  
C2  
V i  
Vref  
n
Vout  
Φ 1  
Φ2  
Φ1  
Φ2  
Φ1  
Φ2  
Φ 1  
Φ2  
V ref  
V
ref  
C3  
C4  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 58 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
8.11.1 Down Mixer  
The PSoC Creator IDE software provides fully integrated  
programming and debug support for PSoC devices. The low cost  
MiniProg3 programmer and debugger is designed to provide full  
programming and debug support of PSoC devices in conjunction  
with the PSoC Creator IDE. PSoC JTAG, SWD, and SWV  
interfaces are compatible with industry standard third party tools.  
The SC/CT block can be used as a mixer to down convert an  
input signal. This circuit is a high bandwidth passive sample  
network that can sample input signals up to 14 MHz. This  
sampled value is then held using the opamp with a maximum  
clock rate of 4 MHz. The output frequency is at the difference  
between the input frequency and the highest integer multiple of  
the Local Oscillator that is less than the input.  
All DOC circuits are disabled by default and can only be enabled  
in firmware. If not enabled, the only way to reenable them is to  
erase the entire device, clear flash protection, and reprogram the  
device with new firmware that enables DOC. Disabling DOC  
features, robust flash protection, and hiding custom analog and  
digital functionality inside the PSoC device provide a level of  
security not possible with multichip application solutions.  
Additionally, all device interfaces can be permanently disabled  
(Device Security) for applications concerned about phishing  
attacks due to a maliciously reprogrammed device. Permanently  
disabling interfaces is not recommended in most applications  
because the you cannot access the device later. Because all  
programming, debug, and test interfaces are disabled when  
Device Security is enabled, PSoCs with Device Security enabled  
may not be returned for failure analysis.  
8.11.2 First Order Modulator – SC Mode  
A first order modulator is constructed by placing the SC/CT block  
in an integrator mode and using a comparator to provide a 1-bit  
feedback to the input. Depending on this bit, a reference voltage  
is either subtracted or added to the input signal. The block output  
is the output of the comparator and not the integrator in the  
modulator case. The signal is downshifted and buffered and then  
processed by a decimator to make a delta-sigma converter or a  
counter to make an incremental converter. The accuracy of the  
sampled data from the first-order modulator is determined from  
several factors.  
The main application for this modulator is for a low frequency  
ADC with high accuracy. Applications include strain gauges,  
thermocouples, precision voltage, and current measurement.  
Table 9-1. Debug Configurations  
Debug and Trace Configuration  
GPIO Pins Used  
All debug and trace disabled  
0
9. Programming, Debug Interfaces,  
Resources  
JTAG  
4 or 5  
SWD  
2
1
3
PSoC devices include extensive support for programming,  
testing, debugging, and tracing both hardware and firmware.  
Three interfaces are available: JTAG, SWD, and SWV. JTAG and  
SWD support all programming and debug features of the device.  
JTAG also supports standard JTAG scan chains for board level  
test and chaining multiple JTAG devices to a single JTAG  
connection.  
SWV  
SWD + SWV  
9.1 JTAG Interface  
The IEEE 1149.1 compliant JTAG interface exists on four or five  
pins (the nTRST pin is optional). The JTAG clock frequency can  
be up to 8 MHz, or 1/3 of the CPU clock frequency for 8 and 16-bit  
transfers, or 1/5 of the CPU clock frequency for 32-bit transfers,  
whichever is least. By default, the JTAG pins are enabled on new  
devices but the JTAG interface can be disabled, allowing these  
pins to be used as General Purpose I/O (GPIO) instead. The  
JTAG interface is used for programming the flash memory,  
debugging, I/O scan chains, and JTAG device chaining.  
For more information on PSoC 3 Programming, refer to the  
application note AN62391 - In-System Programming for  
PSoC® 3.  
Complete Debug on Chip (DoC) functionality enables full device  
debugging in the final system using the standard production  
device. It does not require special interfaces, debugging pods,  
simulators, or emulators. Only the standard programming  
connections are required to fully support debug.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 59 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 9-1. JTAG Interface Connections between PSoC 3 and Programmer  
VDD  
Host Programmer  
PSoC 3  
1, 2, 3, 4  
VDD  
V
DDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3  
TCK (P1[1]  
TCK  
5
5
TMS  
TMS (P1[0])  
TDO  
TDI  
TDI (P1[4])  
TDO (P1[3])  
nTRST (P1[5]) 6  
nTRST 6  
XRES or P1[2] 4, 7  
VSSD, VSSA  
XRES  
GND  
GND  
1 The voltage levels of Host Programmer and the PSoC 3 voltage domains involved in Programming should be same. The  
Port 1 JTAG pins, XRES pin (XRES_N or P1[2]) are powered by VDDIO1. So, VDDIO1 of PSoC 3 should be at same voltage  
level as host VDD. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same voltage level as  
host Programmer.  
2
Vdda must be greater than or equal to all other power supplies (Vddd, Vddio’s) in PSoC 3.  
3
For Power cycle mode Programming, XRES pin is not required. But the Host programmer must have  
the capability to toggle power (Vddd, Vdda, All Vddio’s) to PSoC 3. This may typically require external  
interface circuitry to toggle power which will depend on the programming setup. The power supplies can  
be brought up in any sequence, however, once stable, VDDA must be greater than or equal to all other  
supplies.  
4
For JTAG Programming, Device reset can also be done without connecting to the XRES pin or Power cycle mode by  
using the TMS,TCK,TDI, TDO pins of PSoC 3, and writing to a specific register. But this requires that the DPS setting in  
NVL is not equal to “Debug Ports Disabled”.  
5
By default, PSoC 3 is configured for 4-wire JTAG mode unless user changes the DPS setting. So the TMS pin is  
unidirectional. But if the DPS setting is changed to non-JTAG mode, the TMS pin in JTAG is bi-directional as the SWD  
Protocol has to be used for acquiring the PSoC 3 device initially. After switching from SWD to JTAG mode, the TMS pin  
will be uni-directional. In such a case, unidirectional buffer should not be used on TMS line.  
6
nTRST JTAG pin (P1[5]) cannot be used to reset the JTAG TAP controlller during first time programming of PSoC 3 as  
the default setting is 4-wire JTAG (nTRST disabled). Use the TMS, TCK pins to do a reset of JTAG TAP controller.  
7
If XRES pin is used by host, P1[2] will be configured as XRES by default only for 48-pin devices (without dedicated XRES  
pin). For devices with dedicated XRES pin, P1[2] is GPIO pin by default. So use P1[2] as Reset pin only for 48-pin  
devices, but use dedicated XRES pin for rest of devices.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 60 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
SWD can be enabled on only one of the pin pairs at a time. This  
only happens if, within 8 µs (key window) after reset, that pin pair  
(JTAG or USB) receives a predetermined sequence of 1s and 0s.  
SWD is used for debugging or for programming the flash  
memory.  
9.2 Serial Wire Debug Interface  
The SWD interface is the preferred alternative to the JTAG  
interface. It requires only two pins instead of the four or five  
needed by JTAG. SWD provides all of the programming and  
debugging features of JTAG at the same speed. SWD does not  
provide access to scan chains or device chaining. The SWD  
clock frequency can be up to 1/3 of the CPU clock frequency.  
The SWD interface can be enabled from the JTAG interface or  
disabled, allowing its pins to be used as GPIO. Unlike JTAG, the  
SWD interface can always be reacquired on any device during  
the key window. It can then be used to reenable the JTAG  
interface, if desired. When using SWD or JTAG pins as standard  
GPIO, make sure that the GPIO functionality and PCB circuits do  
not interfere with SWD or JTAG use.  
SWD uses two pins, either two of the JTAG pins (TMS and TCK)  
or the USBIO D+ and D– pins. The USBIO pins are useful for in  
system programming of USB solutions that would otherwise  
require a separate programming connector. One pin is used for  
the data clock and the other is used for data input and output.  
Figure 9-2. SWD Interface Connections between PSoC 3 and Programmer  
VDD  
Host Programmer  
PSoC 3  
1, 2, 3  
VDD  
VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3  
SWDCK  
SWDCK (P1[1] or P15[7])  
SWDIO (P1[0] or P15[6])  
SWDIO  
XRES  
3, 4  
XRES or P1[2]  
GND  
VSSD, VSSA  
GND  
1
The voltage levels of the Host Programmer and the PSoC 3 voltage domains involved in Programming  
should be the same. XRES pin (XRES_N or P1[2]) is powered by VDDIO1. The USB SWD pins are  
powered by VDDD. So for Programming using the USB SWD pins with XRES pin, the VDDD, VDDIO1 of  
PSoC 3 should be at the same voltage level as Host VDD. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDA, VDDIO0  
VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same voltage level as host Programmer. The Port 1 SWD pins are  
powered by VDDIO1. So VDDIO1 of PSoC 3 should be at same voltage level as host VDD for Port 1 SWD  
,
programming. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same  
voltage level as host Programmer.  
2
Vdda must be greater than or equal to all other power supplies (Vddd, Vddio’s) in PSoC 3.  
3
For Power cycle mode Programming, XRES pin is not required. But the Host programmer must have  
the capability to toggle power (Vddd, Vdda, All Vddio’s) to PSoC 3. This may typically require external  
interface circuitry to toggle power which will depend on the programming setup. The power supplies can  
be brought up in any sequence, however, once stable, VDDA must be greater than or equal to all other  
supplies.  
4
P1[2] will be configured as XRES by default only for 48-pin devices (without dedicated XRES pin). For  
devices with dedicated XRES pin, P1[2] is GPIO pin by default. So use P1[2] as Reset pin only for 48-  
pin devices, but use dedicated XRES pin for rest of devices.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 61 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
9.3 Debug Features  
9.6 Programming Features  
Using the JTAG or SWD interface, the CY8C36 supports the  
following debug features:  
The JTAG and SWD interfaces provide full programming  
support. The entire device can be erased, programmed, and  
verified. You can increase flash protection levels to protect  
firmware IP. Flash protection can only be reset after a full device  
erase. Individual flash blocks can be erased, programmed, and  
verified, if block security settings permit.  
„ Halt and single-step the CPU  
„ View and change CPU and peripheral registers, and RAM  
addresses  
9.7 Device Security  
„ Eight program address breakpoints  
PSoC 3 offers an advanced security feature called device  
security, which permanently disables all test, programming, and  
debug ports, protecting your application from external access.  
The device security is activated by programming a 32-bit key  
(0×50536F43) to a Write Once Latch (WOL).  
„ One memory access breakpoint—break on reading or writing  
any memory address and data value  
„ Break on a sequence of breakpoints (non recursive)  
„ Debugging at the full speed of the CPU  
The WOL is a type of nonvolatile latch (NVL). The cell itself is an  
NVL with additional logic wrapped around it. Each WOL device  
contains four bytes (32 bits) of data. The wrapper outputs a ‘1’ if  
a super-majority (28 of 32) of its bits match a pre-determined  
pattern (0×50536F43); it outputs a ‘0’ if this majority is not  
reached. When the output is 1, the Write Once NV latch locks the  
part out of Debug and Test modes; it also permanently gates off  
the ability to erase or alter the contents of the latch. Matching all  
bits is intentionally not required, so that single (or few) bit failures  
do not deassert the WOL output. The state of the NVL bits after  
wafer processing is truly random with no tendency toward 1 or 0.  
„ Debug operations are possible while the device is reset, or in  
low-power modes  
„ CompatiblewithPSoCCreatorandMiniProg3programmerand  
debugger  
„ Standard JTAG programming and debugging interfaces make  
CY8C36 compatible with other popular third-party tools (for  
example, ARM / Keil)  
9.4 Trace Features  
The WOL only locks the part after the correct 32-bit key  
(0×50536F43) is loaded into the NVL's volatile memory,  
programmed into the NVL's nonvolatile cells, and the part is  
reset. The output of the WOL is only sampled on reset and used  
to disable the access. This precaution prevents anyone from  
reading, erasing, or altering the contents of the internal memory.  
The user can write the key into the WOL to lock out external  
access only if no flash protection is set (see “Flash Security” on  
page 20). However, after setting the values in the WOL, a user  
still has access to the part until it is reset. Therefore, a user can  
write the key into the WOL, program the flash protection data,  
and then reset the part to lock it.  
The CY8C36 supports the following trace features when using  
JTAG or SWD:  
„ Trace the 8051 program counter (PC), accumulator register  
(ACC), and one SFR / 8051 core RAM register  
„ Trace depth up to 1000 instructions if all registers are traced,  
or 2000 instructions if only the PC is traced (on devices that  
include trace memory)  
„ Program address trigger to start tracing  
„ Trace windowing, that is, only trace when the PC is within a  
given range  
If the device is protected with a WOL setting, Cypress cannot  
perform failure analysis and, therefore, cannot accept RMAs  
from customers. The WOL can be read out through the SWD port  
to electrically identify protected parts. The user can write the key  
in WOL to lock out external access only if no flash protection is  
set. For more information on how to take full advantage of the  
security features in PSoC see the PSoC 3 TRM.  
„ Two modes for handling trace buffer full: continuous (overwriting  
the oldest trace data) or break when trace buffer is full  
9.5 Single Wire Viewer Interface  
The SWV interface is closely associated with SWD but can also  
be used independently. SWV data is output on the JTAG  
interface’s TDO pin. If using SWV, you must configure the device  
for SWD, not JTAG. SWV is not supported with the JTAG  
interface.  
Disclaimer  
Note the following details of the flash code protection features on  
Cypress devices.  
SWV is ideal for application debug where it is helpful for the  
firmware to output data similar to 'printf' debugging on PCs. The  
SWV is ideal for data monitoring, because it requires only a  
single pin and can output data in standard UART format or  
Manchester encoded format. For example, it can be used to tune  
a PID control loop in which the output and graphing of the three  
error terms greatly simplifies coefficient tuning.  
Cypress products meet the specifications contained in their  
particular Cypress data sheets. Cypress believes that its family  
of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the  
market today, regardless of how they are used. There may be  
methods, unknown to Cypress, that can breach the code  
protection features. Any of these methods, to our knowledge,  
would be dishonest and possibly illegal. Neither Cypress nor any  
other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of  
their code. Code protection does not mean that we are  
guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”  
Cypress is willing to work with the customer who is concerned  
about the integrity of their code. Code protection is constantly  
evolving. We at Cypress are committed to continuously  
improving the code protection features of our products.  
The following features are supported in SWV:  
„ 32 virtual channels, each 32 bits long  
„ Simple, efficient packing and serializing protocol  
„ Supports standard UART format (N81)  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 62 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Application Notes: PSoC application notes discuss a particular  
application of PSoC in depth; examples include brushless DC  
motor control and on-chip filtering. Application notes often  
include example projects in addition to the application note  
document.  
10. Development Support  
The CY8C36 family has a rich set of documentation,  
development tools, and online resources to assist you during  
your development process. Visit  
psoc.cypress.com/getting-started to find out more.  
Technical Reference Manual: The Technical Reference Manual  
(TRM) contains all the technical detail you need to use a PSoC  
device, including a complete description of all PSoC registers.  
10.1 Documentation  
A suite of documentation, supports the CY8C36 family to ensure  
that you can find answers to your questions quickly. This section  
contains a list of some of the key documents.  
10.2 Online  
In addition to print documentation, the Cypress PSoC forums  
connect you with fellow PSoC users and experts in PSoC from  
around the world, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  
Software User Guide: A step-by-step guide for using PSoC  
Creator. The software user guide shows you how the PSoC  
Creator build process works in detail, how to use source control  
with PSoC Creator, and much more.  
10.3 Tools  
With industry standard cores, programming, and debugging  
interfaces, the CY8C36 family is part of a development tool  
ecosystem. Visit us at www.cypress.com/go/psoccreator for the  
latest information on the revolutionary, easy to use PSoC Creator  
IDE, supported third party compilers, programmers, debuggers,  
and development kits.  
Component data sheets: The flexibility of PSoC allows the  
creation of new peripherals (components) long after the device  
has gone into production. Component data sheets provide all of  
the information needed to select and use a particular component,  
including a functional description, API documentation, example  
code, and AC/DC specifications.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 63 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11. Electrical Specifications  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted. The unique flexibility of the PSoC UDBs and analog blocks enable many functions to be implemented in PSoC  
Creator components, see the component data sheets for full AC/DC specifications of individual functions. See the “Example  
Peripherals” section on page 39 for further explanation of PSoC Creator components.  
11.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Table 11-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings DC Specifications  
Parameter  
TSTG  
Description  
Storage temperature  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Higher storage temperatures  
reduce NVL data retention time.  
Recommended storage temper-  
ature is +25 °C ±25 °C. Extended  
duration storage temperatures  
above 85 °C degrade reliability.  
–55  
25  
100  
°C  
VDDA  
VDDD  
Analog supply voltage relative to  
VSSA  
–0.5  
–0.5  
6
6
V
V
Digital supply voltage relative to  
VSSD  
VDDIO  
VCCA  
VCCD  
VSSA  
I/O supply voltage relative to VSSD  
Direct analog core voltage input  
Direct digital core voltage input  
Analog ground voltage  
–0.5  
–0.5  
6
V
V
V
V
1.95  
1.95  
–0.5  
VSSD – 0.5  
VSSD  
0.5  
+
[20]  
VGPIO  
DC input voltage on GPIO  
DC input voltage on SIO  
Includes signals sourced by VDDA VSSD – 0.5  
and routed internal to the pin  
VDDIO  
0.5  
+
V
VSIO  
Output disabled  
Output enabled  
VSSD – 0.5  
7
6
V
V
VSSD – 0.5  
VIND  
Voltage at boost converter input  
Boost converter supply  
0.5  
5.5  
5.5  
100  
2
V
VBAT  
Ivddio  
VSSD – 0.5  
V
Current per VDDIO supply pin  
ADC external reference inputs  
Latch up current[21]  
mA  
V
Vextref  
LU  
Pins P0[3], P3[2]  
–140  
750  
500  
140  
mA  
V
ESDHBM  
ESDCDM  
Electrostatic discharge voltage  
Electrostatic discharge voltage  
Human body model  
Charge device model  
V
Note Usage above the absolute maximum conditions listed in Table 11-1 may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to  
maximum conditions for extended periods of time may affect device reliability. When used below maximum conditions but above  
normal operating conditions the device may not operate to specification.  
Notes  
20. The VDDIO supply voltage must be greater than the maximum analog voltage on the associated GPIO pins. Maximum analog voltage on GPIO pin VDDIO VDDA  
21. Meets or exceeds JEDEC Spec EIA/JESD78 IC Latch-up Test.  
.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 64 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.2 Device Level Specifications  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted.  
11.2.1 Device Level Specifications  
Table 11-2. DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
VDDA  
Analog supply voltage and input to Analog core regulator enabled  
analog core regulator  
1.8  
5.5  
V
VDDA  
VDDD  
VDDD  
Analog supply voltage, analog  
regulator bypassed  
Analog core regulator disabled  
Digital core regulator enabled  
Digital core regulator disabled  
1.71  
1.8  
1.8  
1.89  
V
V
V
[22]  
Digital supply voltage relative to  
VSSD  
VDDA  
Digital supply voltage, digital  
regulator bypassed  
1.71  
1.8  
1.89  
[23]  
[22]  
VDDIO  
I/O supply voltage relative to VSSIO  
1.71  
1.71  
VDDA  
1.89  
V
V
VCCA  
Direct analog core voltage input  
(Analog regulator bypass)  
Analog core regulator disabled  
Digital core regulator disabled  
1.8  
VCCD  
Direct digital core voltage input  
(Digital regulator bypass)  
1.71  
1.8  
1.89  
V
[24]  
IDD  
Active Mode, VDD = 1.71 V–5.5 V  
Bus clock off. Execute from CPU  
instruction buffer. See “Flash  
Program Memory” on page 20.  
CPU at 3 MHz  
CPU at 6 MHz  
CPU at 12 MHz  
CPU at 24 MHz  
CPU at 48 MHz  
CPU at 62.6 MHz  
T = –40 °C  
0.8  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
1.2  
2.0  
3.5  
6.6  
9.0  
VDD = 3.3 V, T = 25 °C, IMO and bus CPU at 3 MHz  
clock enabled, ILO = 1 kHz, CPU  
executing from flash and accessing  
SRAM, all other blocks off, all I/Os  
1.4  
2.2  
3.6  
6.4  
11.8  
15.8  
CPU at 6 MHz  
CPU at 12 MHz  
CPU at 24 MHz  
CPU at 48 MHz  
CPU at 62.6 MHz  
tied low.  
Notes  
22. The power supplies can be brought up in any sequence however once stable VDDA must be greater than or equal to all other supplies.  
23. The VDDIO supply voltage must be greater than the maximum analog voltage on the associated GPIO pins. Maximum analog voltage on GPIO pin VDDIO VDDA  
.
24. The current consumption of additional peripherals that are implemented only in programmed logic blocks can be found in their respective data sheets, available in  
PSoC Creator, the integrated design environment. To estimate total current, find CPU current at frequency of interest and add peripheral currents for your particular  
system from the device data sheet and component data sheets.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 65 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-2. DC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Sleep Mode[26]  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
CPU = OFF  
V
DD = VDDIO = 4.5–5.5 V T = –40 °C  
1
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
RTC = ON (= ECO32K ON, in  
low-power mode)  
Sleep timer = ON (= ILO ON at  
1 kHz)[27]  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
VDD = VDDIO = 2.7–3.6 V T = –40 °C  
WDT = OFF  
T = 25 °C  
I2C Wake = OFF  
T = 85 °C  
VDD = VDDIO = 1.71–1.95 V T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
Comparator = OFF  
POR = ON  
Boost = OFF  
SIO pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
T = 85 °C  
Comparator = ON  
CPU = OFF  
VDD = VDDIO = 2.7–3.6 V T = 25 °C  
µA  
RTC = OFF  
Sleep timer = OFF  
WDT = OFF  
I2C Wake = OFF  
POR = ON  
Boost = OFF  
SIO pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
I2C Wake = ON  
CPU = OFF  
VDD = VDDIO = 2.7–3.6 V T = 25 °C  
µA  
RTC = OFF  
Sleep timer = OFF  
WDT = OFF  
Comparator = OFF  
POR = ON  
Boost = OFF  
SIO pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
Hibernate Mode[26]  
V
DD = VDDIO = 4.5–5.5 V T = –40 °C  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
Hibernate mode current  
All regulators and oscillators off.  
SRAM retention  
GPIO interrupts are active  
Boost = OFF  
SIO pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
VDD = VDDIO = 2.7–3.6 V T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
200  
T = 85 °C  
VDD = VDDIO = 1.71–1.95 V T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
Notes  
25. The current consumption of additional peripherals that are implemented only in programmed logic blocks can be found in their respective data sheets, available in  
PSoC Creator, the integrated design environment. To compute total current, find CPU current at frequency of interest and add peripheral currents for your particular  
system from the device data sheet and component data sheets.  
26. If VCCD and VCCA are externally regulated, the voltage difference between VCCD and VCCA must be less than 50 mV.  
27. Sleep timer generates periodic interrupts to wake up the CPU. This specification applies only to those times that the CPU is off.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 66 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-1. Active Mode Current vs FCPU, VDD = 3.3 V,  
Temperature = 25 °C  
Figure 11-2. Active Mode Current vs Temperature and FCPU  
VDD = 3.3 V  
,
Figure 11-3. Active Mode Current vs VDD and Temperature,  
FCPU = 24 MHz  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 67 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-3. AC Specifications[28]  
Parameter Description  
FCPU  
Conditions  
1.71 V VDDD 5.5 V  
1.71 V VDDD 5.5 V  
Min  
DC  
DC  
Typ  
Max  
67.01  
67.01  
1
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
V/ns  
µs  
CPU frequency  
Bus frequency  
FBUSCLK  
Svdd  
VDD ramp rate  
TIO_INIT  
Time from VDDD/VDDA/VCCD/VCCA  
IPOR to I/O ports set to their reset  
states  
10  
TSTARTUP  
Time from VDDD/VDDA/VCCD/VCCA  
PRES to CPU executing code at VDDA/VDDD, no PLL used, fast IMO  
reset vector  
V
CCA/VDDA = regulated from  
33  
66  
15  
µs  
µs  
µs  
boot mode (48 MHz typ.)  
V
V
CCA/VCCD = regulated from  
DDA/VDDD, no PLL used, slow  
IMO boot mode (12 MHz typ.)  
TSLEEP  
Wakeup from sleep mode –  
Application of non–LVD interrupt to  
beginning of execution of next CPU  
instruction  
THIBERNATE  
Wakeup from hibernate mode –  
Application of external interrupt to  
beginning of execution of next CPU  
instruction  
100  
µs  
Figure 11-4. FCPU vs. VDD  
5.5 V  
Valid Operating Region  
3.3 V  
1.71 V  
0.5 V  
Valid Operating Region with SMP  
0 V  
DC  
1 MHz  
10 MHz  
67 MHz  
CPU Frequency  
Note  
28. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 68 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.3 Power Regulators  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted.  
11.3.1 Digital Core Regulator  
Table 11-4. Digital Core Regulator DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VDDD  
Description  
Input voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
1.8  
Typ  
Max  
5.5  
Units  
V
VCCD  
Output voltage  
1.80  
1
V
Regulator output capacitor  
± 10%, ×5R ceramic or better. The two  
µF  
V
CCD pins must be shorted together, with  
as short a trace as possible, see Power  
System on page 28  
Figure 11-5. Regulators VCC vs VDD  
Figure 11-6. Digital Regulator PSRR vs Frequency and VDD  
11.3.2 Analog Core Regulator  
Table 11-5. Analog Core Regulator DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VDDA  
Description  
Input voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
1.8  
Typ  
Max  
5.5  
Units  
V
VCCA  
Output voltage  
1.80  
1
V
Regulator output capacitor  
±10%, ×5R ceramic or better  
µF  
Figure 11-7. Analog Regulator PSRR vs Frequency and VDD  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 69 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.3.3 Inductive Boost Regulator.  
Table 11-6. Inductive Boost Regulator DC Specifications  
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are: VBAT = 2.4 V, VOUT = 2.7 V, IOUT = 40 mA, FSW = 400 kHz, LBOOST = 10 µH,  
BOOST = 22 µF || 0.1 µF  
C
Parameter Description  
VBAT  
Conditions  
T=-35 °C to +65 °C  
Min  
0.5  
0.68  
Typ  
Max  
3.6  
3.6  
50  
Units  
V
Input voltage  
Includes startup  
Over entire temperature range  
V
IOUT  
Load current[29, 30]  
VBAT = 1.6 – 3.6 V, VOUT = 3.6 – 5.0 V,  
external diode  
mA  
VBAT = 1.6 – 3.6 V, VOUT = 1.6 – 3.6 V,  
internal diode  
75  
30  
20  
15  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
VBAT = 0.8 – 1.6 V, VOUT = 1.6 – 3.6 V,  
internal diode  
VBAT = 0.8 – 1.6 V, VOUT = 3.6 – 5.0 V,  
external diode  
VBAT = 0.5 – 0.8 V, VOUT = 1.6 – 3.6 V,  
internal diode  
ILPK  
IQ  
Inductor peak current  
Quiescent current  
700  
mA  
µA  
µA  
Boost active mode  
200  
12  
Boost standby mode, 32 khz external crystal  
oscillator, IOUT < 1 µA  
VOUT  
Boost voltage range[33, 32]  
1.8 V  
1.71  
1.81  
1.90  
2.28  
2.57  
2.85  
3.14  
3.42  
4.75  
1.80  
1.90  
2.00  
2.40  
2.70  
3.00  
3.30  
3.60  
5.00  
1.89  
2.00  
2.10  
2.52  
2.84  
3.15  
3.47  
3.78  
5.25  
3.8  
V
V
1.9 V  
2.0 V  
V
2.4 V  
V
2.7 V  
V
3.0 V  
V
3.3 V  
V
3.6 V  
V
5.0 V  
External diode required  
V
RegLOAD  
RegLINE  
η
Load regulation  
Line regulation  
Efficiency  
%
%
%
%
4.1  
LBOOST = 10 µH  
LBOOST = 22 µH  
70  
85  
82  
90  
Notes  
29. For output voltages above 3.6 V, an external diode is required.  
30. Maximum output current applies for output voltages 4x input voltage.  
31. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
32. At boost frequency of 2 MHz, VOUT is limited to 2 x VBAT. At 400 kHz, VOUT is limited to 4 x VBAT  
.
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 70 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-7. Inductive Boost Regulator AC Specifications  
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are: VBAT = 2.4 V, VOUT = 2.7 V, IOUT = 40 mA, FSW = 400 kHz, LBOOST = 10 µH,  
BOOST = 22 µF || 0.1 µF.  
Parameter Description  
VRIPPLE  
C
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Ripple voltage  
(peak-to-peak)  
VOUT = 1.8 V, FSW = 400 kHz, IOUT = 10 mA  
100  
mV  
FSW  
Switching frequency  
0.1, 0.4,  
or 2  
MHz  
Table 11-8. Recommended External Components for Boost Circuit  
Parameter  
LBOOST  
CBOOST  
IF  
Description  
Boost inductor  
Filter capacitor[33]  
Conditions  
Min  
4.7  
10  
1
Typ  
10  
22  
Max  
Units  
µH  
µF  
47  
47  
External Schottky diode  
average forward current  
External Schottky diode is required for  
A
VOUT > 3.6 V  
VR  
20  
V
Figure 11-8. Efficiency vs VOUT  
IOUT = 30 mA, VBAT ranges from 0.7 V to VOUT, LBOOST = 22 µH  
Figure 11-9. Efficiency vs VBAT  
IOUT = 30 mA, VOUT = 3.3 V, LBOOST = 22 µH  
Note  
33. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 71 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-10. Efficiency vs IOUT  
VBAT = 2.4 V, VOUT = 3.3 V  
Figure 11-11. Efficiency vs IOUT  
VBAT ranges from 0.7 V to 3.3 V, LBOOST = 22 µH  
Figure 11-12. Efficiency vs Switching Frequency  
VOUT = 3.3 V, VBAT = 2.4 V, IOUT = 40 mA  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 72 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.4 Inputs and Outputs  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted. Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values.  
11.4.1 GPIO  
Table 11-9. GPIO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Input voltage high threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Input voltage high threshold  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
VIH  
VIL  
VIH  
CMOS Input, PRT[×]CTL = 0 0.7 × VDDIO  
CMOS Input, PRT[×]CTL = 0  
V
V
V
0.3 × VDDIO  
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL =  
1,VDDIO < 2.7 V  
0.7 × VDDIO  
VIH  
VIL  
Input voltage high threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Output voltage high  
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL = 1,  
VDDIO 2.7V  
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL =  
1,VDDIO < 2.7 V  
2.0  
0.3 × VDDIO  
0.8  
V
V
V
VIL  
LVTTL Input, PRT[×]CTL = 1,  
VDDIO 2.7V  
IOH = 4 mA at 3.3 VDDIO  
IOH = 1 mA at 1.8 VDDIO  
IOL = 8 mA at 3.3 VDDIO  
IOL = 4 mA at 1.8 VDDIO  
VOH  
VDDIO – 0.6  
V
V
VDDIO – 0.5  
VOL  
Output voltage low  
0.6  
0.6  
8.5  
8.5  
2
V
V
Rpullup  
Pull-up resistor  
3.5  
3.5  
5.6  
5.6  
kΩ  
kΩ  
nA  
pF  
pF  
mV  
Rpulldown Pull-down resistor  
IIL  
Input leakage current (absolute value)[34] 25 °C, VDDIO = 3.0 V  
Input capacitance[34]  
CIN  
GPIOs without opamp outputs  
GPIOs with opamp outputs  
7
18  
VH  
Input voltage hysteresis  
(Schmitt-Trigger)[34]  
40  
Idiode  
Current through protection diode to  
100  
µA  
VDDIO and VSSIO  
Rglobal  
Rmux  
Resistance pin to analog global bus  
Resistance pin to analog mux bus  
25 °C, VDDIO = 3.0 V  
25 °C, VDDIO = 3.0 V  
320  
220  
Ω
Ω
Figure 11-13. GPIO Output High Voltage and Current  
Figure 11-14. GPIO Output Low Voltage and Current  
Note  
34. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 73 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-10. GPIO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
TriseF  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
12  
12  
60  
60  
Units  
ns  
Rise time in Fast Strong Mode[35]  
Fall time in Fast Strong Mode[35]  
Rise time in Slow Strong Mode[35]  
Fall time in Slow Strong Mode[35]  
GPIO output operating frequency  
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF  
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF  
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF  
3.3 V VDDIO Cload = 25 pF  
TfallF  
ns  
TriseS  
TfallS  
ns  
ns  
2.7 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, fast strong drive 90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
mode  
33  
MHz  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 2.7 V, fast strong drive 90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
mode  
20  
7
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
Fgpioout  
3.3 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, slow strong drive 90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
mode  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 3.3 V, slow strong  
drive mode  
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
3.5  
GPIO input operating frequency  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V  
Fgpioin  
90/10% VDDIO  
66  
MHz  
Figure 11-15. GPIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Fast Strong  
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
Figure 11-16. GPIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Slow Strong  
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
Note  
35. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 74 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.4.2 SIO  
Table 11-11. SIO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vinmax  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Maximum input voltage  
All allowed values of Vddio and  
Vddd, see Section 11.2.1  
5.5  
V
Vinref  
Input voltage reference (Differ-  
ential input mode)  
0.5  
0.52 × VDDIO  
V
Output voltage reference (Regulated output mode)  
VDDIO > 3.7  
Voutref  
1
1
VDDIO – 1  
VDDIO – 0.5  
V
V
VDDIO < 3.7  
Input voltage high threshold  
GPIO mode  
Differential input mode[36]  
Input voltage low threshold  
GPIO mode  
Differential input mode[36]  
Output voltage high  
Unregulated mode  
Regulated mode[36]  
Regulated mode[36]  
Output voltage low  
VIH  
CMOS input  
0.7 × VDDIO  
SIO_ref + 0.2  
V
V
Hysteresis disabled  
VIL  
CMOS input  
0.3 × VDDIO  
SIO_ref – 0.2  
V
V
Hysteresis disabled  
IOH = 4 mA, VDDIO = 3.3 V  
IOH = 1 mA  
IOH = 0.1 mA  
VDDIO – 0.4  
SIO_ref – 0.65  
SIO_ref – 0.3  
V
V
V
VOH  
SIO_ref + 0.2  
SIO_ref + 0.2  
VOL  
V
DDIO = 3.30 V, IOL = 25 mA  
0.8  
0.4  
8.5  
8.5  
V
V
VDDIO = 1.80 V, IOL = 4 mA  
Rpullup  
Rpulldown  
IIL  
Pull-up resistor  
3.5  
3.5  
5.6  
5.6  
kΩ  
kΩ  
Pull-down resistor  
Input leakage current (absolute  
value)[37]  
VIH < Vddsio  
VIH > Vddsio  
Input Capacitance[37]  
25 °C, Vddsio = 3.0 V, VIH = 3.0 V  
25 °C, Vddsio = 0 V, VIH = 3.0 V  
14  
10  
7
nA  
µA  
pF  
CIN  
VH  
Input voltage hysteresis  
(Schmitt-Trigger)[37]  
Single ended mode (GPIO mode)  
Differential mode  
40  
35  
mV  
mV  
µA  
Current through protection diode  
to VSSIO  
100  
Idiode  
Notes  
36. See Figure 6-9 on page 34 and Figure 6-12 on page 37 for more information on SIO reference.  
37. Based on device characterization (Not production tested)  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 75 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-17. SIO Output High Voltage and Current,  
Unregulated Mode  
Figure 11-18. SIO Output Low Voltage and Current,  
Unregulated Mode  
Figure 11-19. SIO Output High Voltage and Current, Regulat-  
ed Mode  
Table 11-12. SIO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
TriseF  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Rise time in Fast Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[37]  
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.3 V  
12  
ns  
TfallF  
TriseS  
TfallS  
Fall time in Fast Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[37]  
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.3 V  
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.0 V  
Cload = 25 pF, VDDIO = 3.0 V  
12  
75  
60  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Rise time in Slow Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[37]  
Fall time in Slow Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[37]  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 76 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-12. SIO AC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
SIO output operating frequency  
2.7 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Unregu-  
lated output (GPIO) mode, fast  
strong drive mode  
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
33  
MHz  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 2.7 V, Unregu- 90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
lated output (GPIO) mode, fast  
strong drive mode  
16  
5
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
3.3 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Unregu-  
lated output (GPIO) mode, slow  
strong drive mode  
90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 3.3 V, Unregu- 90/10% VDDIO into 25 pF  
lated output (GPIO) mode, slow  
strong drive mode  
4
Fsioout  
2.7 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Regulated Output continuously switching  
20  
10  
2.5  
output mode, fast strong drive  
mode  
into 25 pF  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 2.7 V, Regulated Output continuously switching  
output mode, fast strong drive  
mode  
into 25 pF  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V, Regulated Output continuously switching  
output mode, slow strong drive  
mode  
into 25 pF  
SIO input operating frequency  
1.71 V < VDDIO < 5.5 V  
Fsioin  
90/10% VDDIO  
66  
MHz  
Figure 11-20. SIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Fast Strong  
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
Figure 11-21. SIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Slow Strong  
Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
11.4.3 USBIO  
For operation in GPIO mode, the standard range for VDDD applies, see Device Level Specifications on page 65.  
Table 11-13. USBIO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Rusbi  
Description  
USB D+ pull-up resistance  
USB D+ pull-up resistance  
Static output high  
Conditions  
With idle bus  
Min  
0.900  
1.425  
2.8  
Typ  
Max  
1.575  
3.090  
3.6  
Units  
kΩ  
Rusba  
While receiving traffic  
kΩ  
Vohusb  
15 kΩ ±5% to Vss, internal pull-up  
enabled  
V
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 77 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-13. USBIO DC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Volusb Static output low  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
15 kΩ ±5% to Vss, internal pull-up  
0.3  
V
enabled  
Vihgpio  
Vilgpio  
Vohgpio  
Volgpio  
Vdi  
Input voltage high, GPIO mode  
Input voltage low, GPIO mode  
Output voltage high, GPIO mode  
Output voltage low, GPIO mode  
Differential input sensitivity  
V
V
I
3 V  
3 V  
2
V
V
V
V
V
V
DDD  
DDD  
0.8  
= 4 mA, V  
= 4 mA, V  
3 V  
3 V  
2.4  
OH  
DDD  
I
0.3  
0.2  
2.5  
OL  
DDD  
|(D+)–(D–)|  
Vcm  
Differential input common mode  
range  
0.8  
Vse  
Single ended receiver threshold  
PS/2 pull-up resistance  
0.8  
3
2
7
V
Rps2  
In PS/2 mode, with PS/2 pull-up  
enabled  
kΩ  
External USB series resistor  
In series with each USB pin  
21.78  
(–1%)  
22  
22.22  
(+1%)  
Ω
Rext  
Zo  
USB driver output impedance  
Including Rext  
28  
44  
20  
2
Ω
C
USB transceiver input capacitance  
pF  
nA  
IN  
I
Input leakage current (absolute value) 25 °C, V  
= 3.0 V  
IL  
DDD  
Figure 11-22. USBIO Output High Voltage and Current, GPIO  
Mode  
Figure 11-23. USBIO Output Low Voltage and Current, GPIO  
Mode  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 78 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-14. USBIO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Tdrate  
Full-speed data rate average bit rate  
12 – 0.25%  
12  
12 +  
0.25%  
MHz  
Tjr1  
Receiver data jitter tolerance to next transition  
Receiver data jitter tolerance to pair transition  
Driver differential jitter to next transition  
Driver differential jitter to pair transition  
–8  
–5  
8
5
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Tjr2  
Tdj1  
Tdj2  
Tfdeop  
–3.5  
–4  
3.5  
4
Source jitter for differential transition to SE0  
transition  
–2  
5
Tfeopt  
Tfeopr  
Tfst  
Source SE0 interval of EOP  
160  
82  
175  
ns  
ns  
Receiver SE0 interval of EOP  
Width of SE0 interval during differential transition  
14  
20  
6
ns  
Fgpio_out GPIO mode output operating frequency  
3 V VDDD 5.5 V  
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
VDDD = 1.71 V  
Tr_gpio  
Tf_gpio  
Rise time, GPIO mode, 10%/90% VDDD  
Fall time, GPIO mode, 90%/10% VDDD  
VDDD > 3 V, 25 pF load  
VDDD = 1.71 V, 25 pF load  
VDDD > 3 V, 25 pF load  
12  
40  
12  
40  
ns  
ns  
VDDD = 1.71 V, 25 pF load  
ns  
Figure11-24. USBIOOutputRiseandFallTimes, GPIOMode,  
DDD = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
V
Table 11-15. USB Driver AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Tr Transition rise time  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
20  
Units  
ns  
Tf  
Transition fall time  
20  
ns  
TR  
Rise/fall time matching  
V
USB_5, VUSB_3.3, see USB DC  
90%  
111%  
Specifications on page 99  
Vcrs  
Output signal crossover voltage  
1.3  
2
V
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 79 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.4.4 XRES  
Table 11-16. XRES DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VIH  
Description  
Input voltage high threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Conditions  
Min  
0.7 × VDDIO  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
V
VIL  
0.3 ×  
VDDIO  
Rpullup  
CIN  
Pull-up resistor  
Input capacitance[39]  
3.5  
5.6  
3
8.5  
kΩ  
pF  
VH  
Input voltage hysteresis  
(Schmitt–Trigger)[39]  
100  
mV  
Idiode  
Current through protection diode to  
VDDIO and VSSIO  
100  
µA  
Table 11-17. XRES AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Reset pulse width  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
TRESET  
1
µs  
38.  
11.5 Analog Peripherals  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted.  
11.5.1 Opamp  
Table 11-18. Opamp DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VIOFF  
Description  
Input offset voltage  
Input offset voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
2
Units  
mV  
Vos  
2.5  
2
mV  
Operating temperature –40 °C to  
70 °C  
mV  
TCVos  
Ge1  
Cin  
Input offset voltage drift with temperature Power mode = high  
±30  
±0.1  
18  
µV / °C  
Gain error, unity gain buffer mode  
Input capacitance  
Rload = 1 kΩ  
%
pF  
V
Routing from pin  
Vo  
Output voltage range  
1 mA, source or sink, power mode = V  
high  
+ 0.05  
V
SSA  
DDA  
0.05  
Iout  
Output current, source or sink  
V
+ 500 mV Vout V  
25  
16  
mA  
mA  
SSA  
DDA  
–500 mV, V  
> 2.7 V  
DDA  
V
+ 500 mV Vout V  
SSA  
DDA  
–500 mV, 1.7 V = V  
Power mode = min  
Power mode = low  
2.7 V  
DDA  
Idd  
Quiescent current  
200  
250  
330  
1000  
270  
400  
950  
2500  
uA  
uA  
uA  
uA  
dB  
dB  
dB  
Power mode = med  
Power mode = high  
CMRR  
PSRR  
Common mode rejection ratio  
Power supply rejection ratio  
80  
85  
70  
Vdda 2.7 V  
Vdda < 2.7 V  
Note  
39. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 80 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-25. Opamp Voffset Histogram, 3388 samples/847  
parts, 25 °C, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-26. Opamp Voffset vs Temperature, Vdda = 5V  
Figure 11-27. Opamp Voffset vs Vcommon and  
Vdda, 25 °C  
Figure 11-28. Opamp Output Voltage vs Load Current and  
Temperature, High Power Mode, 25 °C, Vdda = 2.7 V  
Figure 11-29. Opamp Operating Current vs Vdda and Power  
Mode  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 81 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-19. Opamp AC Specifications  
Parameter  
GBW  
Description  
Gain-bandwidth product  
Conditions  
Min  
1
2
1
3
1.1  
0.9  
3
Typ  
45  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
V/µs  
V/µs  
V/µs  
Power mode = minimum, 200 pF load  
Power mode = low, 200 pF load  
Power mode = medium, 200 pF load  
Power mode = high, 200 pF load  
Power mode = low, 200 pF load  
Power mode = medium, 200 pF load  
Power mode = high, 200 pF load  
SR  
en  
Slew rate, 20% - 80%  
Input noise density  
Power mode = high, Vdda = 5 V,  
at 100 kHz  
nV/sqrtHz  
Figure 11-30. Opamp Noise vs Frequency, Power Mode =  
High, Vdda = 5V  
Figure 11-31. Opamp Step Response, Rising  
Figure 11-32. Opamp Step Response, Falling  
Note  
40. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 82 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.5.2 Delta-Sigma ADC  
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are:  
„ Operation in continuous sample mode  
„ fclk = 6.144 MHz  
„ Reference = 1.024 V internal reference bypassed on P3.2 or P0.3  
„ Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values  
Table 11-20. 12-bit Delta-sigma ADC DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
8
12  
bits  
No. of  
GPIO  
Number of channels, single ended  
Differential pair is formed using a  
pair of GPIOs.  
Yes  
Buffered, buffer gain = 1,  
Range = ±1.024 V, 25 °C  
No. of  
GPIO/2  
Number of channels, differential  
Monotonic  
Ge  
Gain error  
±0.2  
%
Buffered, buffer gain = 1,  
Range = ±1.024 V  
Buffered, 16-bit mode, VDDA = 2.7 V,  
25 °C  
Buffer gain = 1, 16-bit,  
Range = ±1.024 V  
Gd  
Gain drift  
50  
ppm/°C  
mV  
Vos  
TCVos  
Input offset voltage  
±0.1  
Temperature coefficient, input offset  
voltage  
Input voltage range, single ended[41]  
Input voltage range, differential unbuf-  
fered[41]  
55  
µV/°C  
VSSA  
VSSA  
VDDA  
VDDA  
V
V
Input voltage range, differential,  
VSSA  
VDDA – 1  
V
buffered[41]  
INL12  
DNL12  
INL8  
DNL8  
Rin_Buff  
Integral non linearity[41]  
Differential non linearity[41]  
Integral non linearity[41]  
Differential non linearity[41]  
ADC input resistance  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Input buffer used  
10  
±1  
±1  
±1  
±1  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
MΩ  
Input buffer bypassed, 12 bit, Range  
= ±1.024 V  
Rin_ADC12 ADC input resistance  
148[42]  
kΩ  
ADC external reference input voltage, see  
also internal reference in Voltage  
Reference on page 85  
Vextref  
Pins P0[3], P3[2]  
0.9  
1.3  
V
Current Consumption  
IDD_12  
Current consumption, 12 bit[41]  
IBUFF  
Buffer current consumption[41]  
192 ksps, unbuffered  
1.4  
2.5  
mA  
mA  
Notes  
41. Based on device characterization (not production tested).  
42. By using switched capacitors at the ADC input an effective input resistance is created. Holding the gain and number of bits constant, the resistance is proportional to  
the inverse of the clock frequency. This value is calculated, not measured. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 83 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-21. Delta-sigma ADC AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
4
Units  
Samples  
%
Startup time  
Total harmonic distortion[43]  
THD  
Buffer gain = 1, 16 bit,  
Range = ±1.024 V  
0.0032  
12-Bit Resolution Mode  
SR12  
BW12  
Sample rate, continuous, high power[43]  
Input bandwidth at max sample rate[43]  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
4
44  
192  
ksps  
kHz  
dB  
SINAD12int Signal to noise ratio, 12-bit, internal reference[43]  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered 66  
8-Bit Resolution Mode  
SR8  
Sample rate, continuous, high power[43]  
Input bandwidth at max sample rate[43]  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
8
88  
384  
ksps  
kHz  
dB  
BW8  
SINAD8int Signal to noise ratio, 8-bit, internal reference[43]  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered 43  
Table 11-22. Delta-sigma ADC Sample Rates, Range = ±1.024 V  
Continuous  
Multi-Sample  
Resolution,  
Bits  
Min  
Max  
Min  
1911  
1543  
1348  
1154  
978  
Max  
8
8000  
6400  
5566  
4741  
4000  
384000  
307200  
267130  
227555  
192000  
91701  
74024  
64673  
55351  
46900  
9
10  
11  
12  
Figure 11-33. Delta-sigma ADC IDD vs sps, Range = ±1.024 V,  
Continuous Sample Mode, Input Buffer Bypassed  
Note  
43. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 84 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.5.3 Voltage Reference  
Table 11-23. Voltage Reference Specifications  
See also ADC external reference specifications in Section 11.5.2.  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Initial trimming  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
VREF  
Precision reference voltage  
1.023  
1.024  
1.025  
V
(–0.1%)  
(+0.1%)  
Temperature drift[44]  
20  
ppm/°C  
ppm/Khr  
ppm  
Long term drift  
Thermal cycling drift (stability)[44]  
100  
100  
11.5.4 Analog Globals  
Table 11-24. Analog Globals Specifications  
Parameter  
Rppag  
Description  
Conditions  
VDDA = 3.0 V  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resistance pin-to-pin through  
analog global[45]  
939  
1461  
Ω
Rppmuxbus  
Resistance pin-to-pin through  
analog mux bus[45]  
VDDA = 3.0 V  
721  
1135  
Ω
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 85 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.5.5 Comparator  
Table 11-25. Comparator DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Input offset voltage in fast mode  
Factory trim, Vdda > 2.7 V,  
Vin 0.5 V  
10  
mV  
VOS  
Input offset voltage in slow mode Factory trim, Vin 0.5 V  
Input offset voltage in fast mode[45] Custom trim  
Input offset voltage in slow mode[45] Custom trim  
9
4
4
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
VOS  
VOS  
Input offset voltage in ultra  
low-power mode  
±12  
VHYST  
VICM  
Hysteresis  
Hysteresis enable mode  
High current / fast mode  
Low current / slow mode  
Ultra low power mode  
VSSA  
VSSA  
VSSA  
10  
32  
VDDA – 0.1  
VDDA  
VDDA – 0.9  
mV  
V
Input common mode voltage  
V
V
CMRR  
ICMP  
Common mode rejection ratio  
High current mode/fast mode[44]  
Low current mode/slow mode[44]  
Ultra low-power mode[44]  
50  
dB  
µA  
µA  
µA  
400  
100  
6
Table 11-26. Comparator AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Response time, high current  
mode[44]  
50 mV overdrive, measured  
pin-to-pin  
75  
110  
ns  
Response time, low current  
mode[44]  
50 mV overdrive, measured  
pin-to-pin  
155  
55  
200  
ns  
µs  
TRESP  
Response time, ultra low-power  
mode[44]  
50 mV overdrive, measured  
pin-to-pin  
11.5.6 Current Digital-to-analog Converter (IDAC)  
See the IDAC component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications and APIs.  
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values.  
Table 11-27. IDAC DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
8
Units  
bits  
Resolution  
IOUT  
Output current at code = 255  
Range = 2.048 mA, code = 255,  
VDDA 2.7 V, Rload = 600 Ω  
2.048  
mA  
Range = 2.048 mA, High mode,  
code = 255, VDDA 2.7 V, Rload =  
300 Ω  
2.048  
mA  
Range=255µA, code=255, Rload  
= 600 Ω  
255  
µA  
µA  
Range = 31.875 µA, code = 255,  
31.875  
Rload = 600 Ω  
Monotonicity  
0
Yes  
±1  
Ezs  
Zero scale error  
LSB  
Notes  
44. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
45. The resistance of the analog global and analog mux bus is high if VDDA 2.7 V, and the chip is in either sleep or hibernate mode. Use of analog global and analog  
mux bus under these conditions is not recommended.  
46. The recommended procedure for using a custom trim value for the on-chip comparators can be found in the TRM.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 86 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-27. IDAC DC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter Description  
Eg  
Conditions  
Range = 2.048 mA, 25 °C  
Range = 255 µA, 25 ° C  
Range = 31.875 µA, 25 ° C  
Range = 2.048 mA  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
±2.5  
±2.5  
±3.5  
0.04  
0.04  
0.05  
±1  
Units  
%
Gain error  
%
%
TC_Eg  
INL  
Temperature coefficient of gain  
error  
% / °C  
% / °C  
% / °C  
LSB  
Range = 255 µA  
Range = 31.875 µA  
Integral nonlinearity  
Sink mode, range = 255 µA, Codes  
8 – 255, Rload = 2.4 kΩ, Cload =  
15 pF  
±0.9  
Source mode, range = 255 µA,  
Codes 8 – 255, Rload = 2.4 kΩ,  
Cload = 15 pF  
±1.2  
±1.5  
LSB  
DNL  
Differential nonlinearity  
Sink mode, range = 255 µA, Rload  
= 2.4 kΩ, Cload = 15 pF  
1
±0.3  
±0.3  
±1  
±1  
LSB  
LSB  
V
Source mode, range = 255 µA,  
Rload = 2.4 kΩ, Cload = 15 pF  
Vcompliance  
IDD  
Dropout voltage, source or sink  
mode  
Voltage headroom at max current,  
Rload to Vdda or Rload to Vssa,  
Vdiff from Vdda  
Operating current, code = 0  
Slow mode, source mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
44  
33  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
Slow mode, source mode,  
range = 255 µA,  
Slow mode, source mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
33  
Slow mode, sink mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
36  
Slow mode, sink mode,  
range = 255 µA  
33  
Slow mode, sink mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
33  
Fast mode, source mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
310  
305  
305  
310  
300  
300  
Fast mode, source mode,  
range = 255 µA  
Fast mode, source mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
Fast mode, sink mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
Fast mode, sink mode,  
range = 255 µA  
Fast mode, sink mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 87 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-34. IDAC INL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA,  
Source Mode  
Figure 11-35. IDAC INL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Sink  
Mode  
Figure 11-36. IDAC DNL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA,  
Source Mode  
Figure 11-37. IDAC DNL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Sink  
Mode  
Figure 11-38. IDAC INL vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, Fast  
Mode  
Figure 11-39. IDAC DNL vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA,  
Fast Mode  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 88 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-40. IDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, Range  
= 255 µA, Source Mode  
Figure 11-41. IDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, Range  
= 255 µA, Sink Mode  
Figure 11-42. IDAC Operating Current vs Temperature,  
Range = 255 µA, Code = 0, Source Mode  
Figure 11-43. IDAC Operating Current vs Temperature,  
Range = 255 µA, Code = 0, Sink Mode  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 89 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-28. IDAC AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
FDAC Update rate  
TSETTLE Settling time to 0.5 LSB  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
8
Units  
Msps  
ns  
Range = 31.875 µA or 255 µA, full  
scale transition, fast mode, 600 Ω  
15-pF load  
125  
Figure 11-44. IDAC Step Response, Codes 0x40 - 0xC0,  
255 µA Mode, Source Mode, Fast Mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-45. IDAC Glitch Response, Codes 0x7F - 0x80,  
255 µA Mode, Source Mode, Fast Mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-46. IDAC PSRR vs Frequency  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 90 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.5.7 Voltage Digital to Analog Converter (VDAC)  
See the VDAC component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications and APIs.  
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values.  
Table 11-29. VDAC DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
8
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
bits  
INL1  
Integral nonlinearity  
Differential nonlinearity  
Output resistance  
1 V scale  
1 V scale  
1 V scale  
4 V scale  
±2.1  
±0.3  
4
±2.5  
±1  
LSB  
DNL1  
Rout  
LSB  
kΩ  
16  
1
kΩ  
VOUT  
Output voltage range, code = 255 1 V scale  
V
4 V scale, Vdda = 5 V  
4
V
Monotonicity  
Zero scale error  
Gain error  
Yes  
±0.9  
±2.5  
±2.5  
0.03  
0.03  
100  
500  
VOS  
Eg  
0
LSB  
1 V scale  
4 V scale  
%
%
TC_Eg  
IDD  
Temperature coefficient, gain error 1 V scale  
4 V scale  
%FSR / °C  
%FSR / °C  
µA  
Operating current  
Slow mode  
Fast mode  
µA  
Figure 11-47. VDAC INL vs Input Code, 1 V Mode  
Figure 11-48. VDAC DNL vs Input Code, 1 V Mode  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 91 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-49. VDAC INL vs Temperature, 1 V Mode  
Figure 11-50. VDAC DNL vs Temperature, 1 V Mode  
Figure 11-51. VDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, 1 V  
Mode  
Figure 11-52. VDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, 4 V  
Mode  
Figure 11-53. VDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, 1V  
Mode, Slow Mode  
Figure 11-54. VDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, 1 V  
Mode, Fast Mode  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 92 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-30. VDAC AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
FDAC Update rate  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
1000  
250  
1
Units  
ksps  
ksps  
µs  
1 V scale  
4 V scale  
TsettleP  
TsettleN  
Settling time to 0.1%, step 25% to 1 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
75%  
0.45  
4 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
0.8  
3.2  
1
µs  
µs  
Settling time to 0.1%, step 75% to 1 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
25%  
0.45  
4 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
0.7  
3
µs  
Figure 11-55. VDAC Step Response, Codes 0x40 - 0xC0, 1 V  
Mode, Fast Mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-56. VDAC Glitch Response, Codes 0x7F - 0x80, 1 V  
Mode, Fast Mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-57. VDAC PSRR vs Frequency  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 93 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.5.8 Mixer  
The mixer is created using a SC/CT analog block; see the Mixer component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications  
and APIs.  
Table 11-31. Mixer DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VOS  
Description  
Input offset voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
10  
2
Units  
mV  
Quiescent current  
Gain  
0.9  
0
mA  
G
dB  
Table 11-32. Mixer AC Specifications  
Parameter  
fLO  
Description  
Local oscillator frequency  
Input signal frequency  
Local oscillator frequency  
Input signal frequency  
Slew rate  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
4
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
V/µs  
Down mixer mode  
fin  
fLO  
fin  
Down mixer mode  
Up mixer mode  
Up mixer mode  
14  
1
1
SR  
3
11.5.9 Transimpedance Amplifier  
The TIA is created using a SC/CT analog block; see the TIA component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications  
and APIs.  
Table 11-33. Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VIOFF  
Rconv  
Description  
Input offset voltage  
Conversion resistance[48]  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
10  
Units  
mV  
%
R = 20K; 40 pF load  
–25  
–25  
–25  
–25  
–25  
–25  
–25  
–25  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
2
R = 30K; 40 pF load  
R = 40K; 40 pF load  
R = 80K; 40 pF load  
R = 120K; 40 pF load  
R = 250K; 40 pF load  
R= 500K; 40 pF load  
R = 1M; 40 pF load  
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Quiescent current  
1.1  
mA  
Table 11-34. Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) AC Specifications  
Parameter  
BW  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Input bandwidth (–3 dB)  
R = 20K; –40 pF load  
1500  
kHz  
R = 120K; –40 pF load  
R = 1M; –40 pF load  
240  
25  
kHz  
kHz  
Notes  
47. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
48. Conversion resistance values are not calibrated. Calibrated values and details about calibration are provided in PSoC Creator component data sheets. External  
precision resistors can also be used.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 94 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.5.10 Programmable Gain Amplifier  
The PGA is created using a SC/CT analog block; see the PGA component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications  
and APIs.  
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are:  
„ Operating temperature = 25 °C for typical values  
„ Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values  
Table 11-35. PGA DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vin  
Description  
Input voltage range  
Input offset voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Vssa  
Typ  
Max  
Vdda  
10  
Units  
V
Power mode = minimum  
Vos  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1  
mV  
TCVos  
Input offset voltage drift  
with temperature  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1  
±30  
µV/°C  
Ge1  
Gain error, gain = 1  
Gain error, gain = 16  
Gain error, gain = 50  
DC output nonlinearity  
±0.15  
±2.5  
±5  
%
%
%
Ge16  
Ge50  
Vonl  
Gain = 1  
±0.01  
% of  
FSR  
Cin  
Input capacitance  
7
pF  
V
Voh  
Output voltage swing  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1, Rload = 100 kΩ  
to VDDA / 2  
V
DDA – 0.15  
Vol  
Output voltage swing  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1, Rload = 100 kΩ  
to VDDA / 2  
V
SSA + 0.15  
V
Vsrc  
Output voltage under load  
Operating current  
Iload = 250 µA, Vdda ≥  
2.7V, power mode = high  
300  
mV  
Idd  
Power mode = high  
1.5  
1.65  
mA  
dB  
PSRR  
Power supply rejection  
ratio  
48  
Figure 11-58. PGA Voffset Histogram, 4096 samples/  
1024 parts  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 95 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 11-36. PGA AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
–3 dB bandwidth  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
BW1  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1, input = 100 mV  
peak-to-peak  
6.7  
8
MHz  
SR1  
en  
Slew rate  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1, 20% to 80%  
3
V/µs  
Input noise density  
Power mode = high,  
Vdda = 5 V, at 100 kHz  
43  
nV/sqrtHz  
Figure 11-59. Bandwidth vs. Temperature, at Different Gain  
Settings, Power Mode = High  
Figure 11-60. Noise vs. Frequency, Vdda = 5 V,  
Power Mode = High  
11.5.11 Temperature Sensor  
Table 11-37. Temperature Sensor Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Temp sensor accuracy  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Range: –40 °C to +85 °C  
±5  
°C  
11.5.12 LCD Direct Drive  
Table 11-38. LCD Direct Drive DC Specifications  
Parameter  
ICC  
Description  
LCD system operating current  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
38  
Max  
Units  
μA  
Device sleep mode with wakeup at  
400-Hz rate to refresh LCDs, bus  
clock = 3 Mhz, Vddio = Vdda = 3 V,  
4 commons, 16 segments, 1/4 duty  
cycle, 50 Hz frame rate, no glass  
connected  
ICC_SEG  
VBIAS  
Current per segment driver  
LCD bias range (VBIAS refers to the main VDDA 3 V and VDDA VBIAS  
output voltage(V0) of LCD DAC)  
Strong drive mode  
2
260  
5
µA  
V
LCD bias step size  
LCD capacitance per  
VDDA 3 V and VDDA VBIAS  
Drivers may be combined  
9.1 × VDDA  
500  
mV  
pF  
5000  
segment/common driver  
Long term segment offset  
Output drive current per segment driver) Vddio = 5.5V, strong drive mode  
355  
20  
710  
mV  
µA  
IOUT  
Table 11-39. LCD Direct Drive AC Specifications  
Parameter  
fLCD  
Description  
LCD frame rate  
Conditions  
Min  
10  
Typ  
50  
Max  
150  
Units  
Hz  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 96 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.6 Digital Peripherals  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted.  
11.6.1 Timer  
The following specifications apply to the Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral in timer mode. Timers can also be implemented in UDBs; for  
more information, see the Timer component data sheet in PSoC Creator.  
Table 11-40. Timer DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Block current consumption  
16-bit timer, at listed input clock  
frequency  
µA  
3 MHz  
15  
60  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
12 MHz  
48 MHz  
67 MHz  
260  
350  
Table 11-41. Timer AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Operating frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
15  
30  
15  
15  
30  
15  
30  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
67.01  
Capture pulse width (Internal)  
Capture pulse width (external)  
Timer resolution  
ns  
ns  
Enable pulse width  
ns  
Enable pulse width (external)  
Reset pulse width  
ns  
ns  
Reset pulse width (external)  
ns  
11.6.2 Counter  
The following specifications apply to the Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral, in counter mode. Counters can also be implemented in  
UDBs; for more information, see the Counter component data sheet in PSoC Creator.  
Table 11-42. Counter DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Block current consumption  
16–bit counter, at listed input clock  
frequency  
µA  
3 MHz  
15  
60  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
12 MHz  
48 MHz  
67 MHz  
260  
350  
Table 11-43. Counter AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Operating frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
15  
15  
15  
30  
15  
30  
15  
30  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
67.01  
Capture pulse  
Resolution  
ns  
Pulse width  
ns  
Pulse width (external)  
Enable pulse width  
Enable pulse width (external)  
Reset pulse width  
Reset pulse width (external)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 97 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.6.3 Pulse Width Modulation  
The following specifications apply to the Timer/Counter/PWM peripheral, in PWM mode. PWM components can also be implemented  
in UDBs; for more information, see the PWM component data sheet in PSoC Creator.  
Table 11-44. PWM DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Block current consumption  
16-bit PWM, at listed input clock  
frequency  
µA  
3 MHz  
15  
60  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
12 MHz  
48 MHz  
67 MHz  
260  
350  
Table 11-45. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Operating frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
15  
30  
15  
30  
15  
30  
15  
30  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
67.01  
Pulse width  
Pulse width (external)  
Kill pulse width  
ns  
ns  
Kill pulse width (external)  
Enable pulse width  
ns  
ns  
Enable pulse width (external)  
Reset pulse width  
ns  
ns  
Reset pulse width (external)  
ns  
11.6.4 I2C  
Table 11-46. Fixed I2C DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
250  
260  
30  
Units  
µA  
Block current consumption  
Enabled, configured for 100 kbps  
Enabled, configured for 400 kbps  
Wake from sleep mode  
µA  
µA  
Table 11-47. Fixed I2C AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Bit rate  
Controller Area Network[49]  
Table 11-48. CAN DC Specifications  
1
Mbps  
Parameter  
IDD  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Block current consumption  
200  
µA  
Table 11-49. CAN AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Bit rate  
Minimum 8 MHz clock  
1
Mbit  
Note  
49. Refer to ISO 11898 specification for details.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 98 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.6.5 Digital Filter Block  
Table 11-50. DFB DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
64-tap FIR at FDFB  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
DFB operating current  
100 kHz (1.3 ksps)  
500 kHz (6.7 ksps)  
1 MHz (13.4 ksps)  
10 MHz (134 ksps)  
48 MHz (644 ksps)  
67 MHz (900 ksps)  
0.03  
0.16  
0.33  
3.3  
0.05  
0.27  
0.53  
5.3  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
15.7  
21.8  
25.5  
35.6  
Table 11-51. DFB AC Specifications  
Parameter  
FDFB  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
DFB operating frequency  
DC  
67.01  
MHz  
11.6.6 USB  
Table 11-52. USB DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VUSB_5  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Device supply for USB operation  
USB configured, USB regulator  
enabled  
4.35  
5.25  
V
VUSB_3.3  
VUSB_3  
USB configured, USB regulator  
bypassed  
3.15  
2.85  
3.6  
3.6  
V
V
USB configured, USB regulator  
bypassed[50]  
IUSB_Configured Device supply current in device  
active mode, bus clock and IMO =  
24 MHz  
VDDD = 5 V, FCPU = 1.5 MHz  
10  
8
mA  
mA  
VDDD = 3.3 V, FCPU = 1.5 MHz  
IUSB_Suspended Device supply current in device  
sleep mode  
VDDD = 5 V, connected to USB  
host, PICU configured to wake on  
USB resume signal  
0.5  
mA  
V
DDD = 5 V, disconnected from  
0.3  
0.5  
mA  
mA  
USB host  
VDDD = 3.3 V, connected to USB  
host, PICU configured to wake on  
USB resume signal  
VDDD = 3.3 V, disconnected from  
USB host  
0.3  
mA  
Note  
50. Rise/fall time matching (TR) not guaranteed, see USB Driver AC Specifications on page 79.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 99 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.6.7 Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs)  
PSoC Creator provides a library of prebuilt and tested standard digital peripherals (UART, SPI, LIN, PRS, CRC, timer, counter, PWM,  
AND, OR, and so on) that are mapped to the UDB array. See the component data sheets in PSoC Creator for full AC/DC specifications,  
APIs, and example code.  
Table 11-53. UDB AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Datapath Performance  
FMAX_TIMER  
FMAX_ADDER  
FMAX_CRC  
Maximumfrequencyof16-bittimerin  
a UDB pair  
67.01  
67.01  
67.01  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
Maximum frequency of 16-bit adder  
in a UDB pair  
Maximum frequency of 16-bit  
CRC/PRS in a UDB pair  
PLD Performance  
FMAX_PLD Maximum frequency of a two-pass  
PLD function in a UDB pair  
Clock to Output Performance  
67.01  
MHz  
tCLK_OUT  
Propagation delay for clock in to data 25 °C, Vddd 2.7 V  
20  
25  
55  
ns  
ns  
out, see Figure 11-61.  
tCLK_OUT  
Propagation delay for clock in to data Worst-case placement, routing,  
out, see Figure 11-61.  
and pin selection  
Figure 11-61. Clock to Output Performance  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 100 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.7 Memory  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted.  
11.7.1 Flash  
Table 11-54. Flash DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Erase and program voltage  
VDDD pin  
1.71  
5.5  
V
Table 11-55. Flash AC Specifications  
Parameter  
TWRITE  
Description  
Row write time (erase + program)  
Row erase time  
Min  
Typ  
15  
10  
5
Max  
20  
13  
7
Units  
ms  
TERASE  
ms  
Row program time  
ms  
TBULK  
Bulk erase time (16 KB to 64 KB)  
Sector erase time (8 KB to 16 KB)  
35  
15  
5
ms  
ms  
Total device program time, including  
JTAG or SWD, and other overhead  
seconds  
Flash data retention time, retention  
period measured from last erase cycle TA 55 °C, 100 K erase/program  
Average ambient temp.  
20  
10  
years  
cycles  
Average ambient temp.  
TA 85 °C, 10 K erase/program  
cycles  
11.7.2 EEPROM  
Table 11-56. EEPROM DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Erase and program voltage  
1.71  
5.5  
V
Table 11-57. EEPROM AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
2
Max  
20  
Units  
ms  
TWRITE  
Single row erase/write cycle time  
EEPROM data retention time, retention Average ambient temp, TA 25 °C,  
period measured from last erase cycle 1M erase/program cycles  
20  
years  
Average ambient temp, TA 55 °C,  
20  
10  
100 K erase/program cycles  
Average ambient temp.  
TA 85 °C, 10 K erase/program  
cycles  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 101 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.7.3 Nonvolatile Latches (NVL))  
Table 11-58. NVL DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Erase and program voltage  
VDDD pin  
1.71  
5.5  
V
Table 11-59. NVL AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
NVL endurance  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Programmed at 25 °C  
1K  
program/  
erase  
cycles  
Programmed at 0 °C to 70 °C  
100  
program/  
erase  
cycles  
NVL data retention time  
Programmed at 25 °C  
20  
20  
years  
years  
Programmed at 0 °C to 70 °C  
11.7.4 SRAM  
Table 11-60. SRAM DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VSRAM  
Description  
SRAM retention voltage  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
1.2  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
Table 11-61. SRAM AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
FSRAM  
SRAM operating frequency  
DC  
67.01  
MHz  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 102 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.7.5 External Memory Interface  
EM_CEn  
Figure 11-62. Asynchronous Read Cycle Timing  
Tcel  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
EM_Addr  
Address  
Toel  
EM_OEn  
EM_WEn  
EM_Data  
Tdoesu  
Tdoeh  
Data  
Table 11-62. Asynchronous Read Cycle Specifications  
Parameter Description  
EMIF clock period[51]  
Conditions  
Min  
30.3  
2T – 5  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
nS  
T
Vdda 3.3 V  
Tcel  
EM_CEn low time  
2T+ 5  
nS  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
Toel  
EM_CEn low to EM_Addr valid  
Address hold time after EM_Wen high  
EM_OEn low time  
5
nS  
T
nS  
2T – 5  
T + 15  
3
2T + 5  
nS  
Tdoesu  
Tdoeh  
Data to EM_OEn high setup time  
Data hold time after EM_OEn high  
nS  
nS  
Note  
51. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 74.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 103 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-63. Asynchronous Write Cycle Timing  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
EM_Addr  
EM_CEn  
Address  
Tcel  
Twel  
EM_WEn  
EM_OEn  
Tdweh  
Tdcev  
EM_Data  
Data  
Table 11-63. Asynchronous Write Cycle Specifications  
Parameter  
T
Description  
EMIF clock period[52]  
Conditions  
Vdda 3.3 V  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
nS  
30.3  
Tcel  
EM_CEn low time  
T – 5  
T + 5  
nS  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
Twel  
EM_CEn low to EM_Addr valid  
Address hold time after EM_WEn high  
EM_WEn low time  
T
5
nS  
nS  
T – 5  
T + 5  
7
nS  
Tdcev  
Tdweh  
EM_CEn low to data valid  
Data hold time after EM_WEn high  
nS  
T
nS  
Note  
52. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 74.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 104 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-64. Synchronous Read Cycle Timing  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock  
EM_CEn  
Tceld  
Tcehd  
Taddriv  
Taddrv  
EM_Addr  
EM_OEn  
Address  
Toeld  
Toehd  
Tds  
Data  
EM_Data  
Tadschd  
Tadscld  
EM_ ADSCn  
Table 11-64. Synchronous Read Cycle Specifications  
Parameter  
T
Description  
EMIF clock period[53]  
Conditions  
Vdda 3.3 V  
Min  
30.3  
T/2  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock pulse high  
Tceld  
EM_CEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_CEn high  
EM_Addr valid to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_Addr invalid  
EM_OEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_OEn high  
Data valid before EM_OEn high  
EM_ADSCn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_ADSCn high  
5
Tcehd  
Taddrv  
Taddriv  
Toeld  
T/2 – 5  
5
T/2 – 5  
5
Toehd  
Tds  
T
T + 15  
5
Tadscld  
Tadschd  
T/2 – 5  
Note  
53. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 74.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 105 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-65. Synchronous Write Cycle Timing  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock  
EM_CEn  
Tceld  
Tcehd  
Taddriv  
Taddrv  
EM_Addr  
Address  
Tweld  
Twehd  
EM_WEn  
EM_Data  
Tdh  
Tds  
Data  
Tadschd  
Tadscld  
EM_ ADSCn  
Table 11-65. Synchronous Write Cycle Specifications  
Parameter  
T
Description  
EMIF clock Period[54]  
Conditions  
Vdda 3.3 V  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
nS  
30.3  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock pulse high  
T/2  
Tceld  
EM_CEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_CEn high  
EM_Addr valid to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_Addr invalid  
EM_WEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_WEn high  
Data valid before EM_Clock high  
Data invalid after EM_Clock high  
EM_ADSCn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_ADSCn high  
5
Tcehd  
Taddrv  
Taddriv  
Tweld  
Twehd  
Tds  
T/2 – 5  
5
T/2 – 5  
5
T/2 – 5  
5
Tdh  
T
5
Tadscld  
Tadschd  
T/2 – 5  
Note  
54. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see Table 11-10 on page 74.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 106 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.8 PSoC System Resources  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C TA 85 °C and TJ 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
except where noted.  
11.8.1 POR with Brown Out  
For brown out detect in regulated mode, VDDD and VDDA must be 2.0 V. Brown out detect is not available in externally regulated  
mode.  
Table 11-66. Precise Power On Reset (PRES) with Brown Out DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Precise POR (PPOR)  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
PRESR  
PRESF  
Rising trip voltage  
Falling trip voltage  
Factory trim  
1.64  
1.62  
1.68  
1.66  
V
V
Table 11-67. Power On Reset (POR) with Brown Out AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
0.5  
Units  
µs  
PRES_TR Response time  
V
DDD/VDDA droop rate  
Sleep mode  
5
V/sec  
11.8.2 Voltage Monitors  
Table 11-68. Voltage Monitors DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
LVI  
Trip voltage  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0000b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0001b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0010b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0011b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0100b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0101b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0110b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0111b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1000b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1001b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1010b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1011b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1100b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1101b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1110b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1111b  
Trip voltage  
1.68  
1.89  
2.14  
2.38  
2.62  
2.87  
3.11  
3.35  
3.59  
3.84  
4.08  
4.32  
4.56  
4.83  
5.05  
5.30  
5.57  
1.73  
1.95  
2.20  
2.45  
2.71  
2.95  
3.21  
3.46  
3.70  
3.95  
4.20  
4.45  
4.70  
4.98  
5.21  
5.47  
5.75  
1.77  
2.01  
2.27  
2.53  
2.79  
3.04  
3.31  
3.56  
3.81  
4.07  
4.33  
4.59  
4.84  
5.13  
5.37  
5.63  
5.92  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
HVI  
V
Table 11-69. Voltage Monitors AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Response time  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
1
µs  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 107 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.8.3 Interrupt Controller  
Table 11-70. Interrupt Controller AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Delay from interrupt signal input to ISR Includes worse case completion of  
25  
Tcy CPU  
code execution from ISR code  
longest instruction DIV with 6  
cycles  
11.8.4 JTAG Interface  
Figure 11-66. JTAG Interface Timing  
(1/f_TCK)  
TCK  
TDI  
T_TDI_setup  
T_TDI_hold  
T_TDO_hold  
T_TDO_valid  
TDO  
TMS  
T_TMS_setup  
T_TMS_hold  
Table 11-71. JTAG Interface AC Specifications[55]  
Parameter Description  
f_TCK TCK frequency  
Conditions  
3.3 V VDDD 5 V  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
14[56]  
7[56]  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V  
(T/10) – 5  
T/4  
T_TDI_setup  
TDI setup before TCK high  
T_TMS_setup TMS setup before TCK high  
T_TDI_hold  
T_TDO_valid  
T_TDO_hold  
TDI, TMS hold after TCK high  
TCK low to TDO valid  
T = 1/f_TCK max  
T = 1/f_TCK max  
T = 1/f_TCK max  
T/4  
2T/5  
TDO hold after TCK high  
T/4  
Notes  
55. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
56. f_TCK must also be no more than 1/3 CPU clock frequency.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 108 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.8.5 SWD Interface  
Figure 11-67. SWD Interface Timing  
(1/f_SWDCK)  
SWDCK  
SWDIO  
T_SWDI_setup  
T_SWDI_hold  
(PSoC 3 reading on SWDIO)  
T_SWDO_hold  
T_SWDO_valid  
SWDIO  
(PSoC 3 writing to SWDIO)  
Table 11-72. SWD Interface AC Specifications[57]  
Parameter  
Description  
SWDCLK frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
14[58]  
7[58]  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
f_SWDCK  
3.3 V VDDD 5 V  
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V  
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V,  
SWD over USBIO pins  
5.5[58]  
T_SWDI_setup SWDIO input setup before SWDCK high T = 1/f_SWDCK max  
T/4  
T/4  
T_SWDI_hold SWDIO input hold after SWDCK high  
T_SWDO_valid SWDCK high to SWDIO output  
T = 1/f_SWDCK max  
T = 1/f_SWDCK max  
2T/5  
T_SWDO_hold SWDIO output hold after SWDCK low T = 1/f_SWDCK max  
T/4  
11.8.6 SWV Interface  
[57]  
Table 11-73. SWV Interface AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
SWV mode SWV bit rate  
33  
Mbit  
Notes  
57. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
58. f_SWDCK must also be no more than 1/3 CPU clock frequency.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 109 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.9 Clocking  
Specifications are valid for –40 °C T 85 °C and T 100 °C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V,  
A
J
except where noted.  
11.9.1 32 kHz External Crystal  
[59]  
Table 11-74. 32 kHz External Crystal DC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Operating current  
Conditions  
Low-power mode  
Min  
Typ  
0.25  
6
Max  
1.0  
Units  
µA  
I
CC  
CL  
DL  
External crystal capacitance  
Drive level  
pF  
1
µW  
Table 11-75. 32 kHz External Crystal AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
32.768  
1
Max  
Units  
kHz  
s
F
Frequency  
T
Startup time  
High power mode  
ON  
11.9.2 Internal Main Oscillator  
Table 11-76. IMO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Supply current  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
62.6 MHz  
600  
500  
500  
300  
200  
180  
150  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
48 MHz  
24 MHz – USB mode  
24 MHz – non USB mode  
12 MHz  
With oscillator locking to USB bus  
6 MHz  
3 MHz  
Note  
59. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 110 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-68. IMO Current vs. Frequency  
Table 11-77. IMO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
IMO frequency stability (with factory trim)  
62.6 MHz  
–7  
–5  
7
5
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
µs  
48 MHz  
24 MHz – Non USB mode  
24 MHz – USB mode  
12 MHz  
–4  
4
F
IMO  
With oscillator locking to USB bus  
–0.25  
–3  
0.25  
3
6 MHz  
–2  
2
3 MHz  
–1  
1
[60]  
Startup time  
Fromenable(duringnormalsystem  
operation) or wakeup from  
low-power state  
12  
[60]  
Jitter (peak to peak)  
Jp–p  
F = 24 MHz  
F = 3 MHz  
0.9  
1.6  
ns  
ns  
[60]  
Jitter (long term)  
Jperiod  
F = 24 MHz  
F = 3 MHz  
0.9  
12  
ns  
ns  
Note  
60. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 111 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 11-69. IMO Frequency Variation vs. Temperature  
Figure 11-70. IMO Frequency Variation vs. VCC  
11.9.3 Internal Low Speed Oscillator  
Table 11-78. ILO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Operating current  
Conditions  
= 1 kHz  
Min  
Typ  
0.3  
1.0  
1.0  
2.0  
Max  
1.7  
2.6  
2.6  
15  
Units  
µA  
F
F
F
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
I
= 33 kHz  
µA  
CC  
= 100 kHz  
µA  
Leakage current  
Power down mode  
nA  
Table 11-79. ILO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Startup time, all frequencies  
ILO frequencies (trimmed)  
100 kHz  
Conditions  
Turbo mode  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
2
ms  
45  
100  
1
200  
2
kHz  
kHz  
1 kHz  
0.5  
F
ILO  
ILO frequencies (untrimmed)  
100 kHz  
30  
100  
1
300  
3.5  
kHz  
kHz  
1 kHz  
0.3  
Figure 11-71. ILO Frequency Variation vs. Temperature  
Figure 11-72. ILO Frequency Variation vs. VDD  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 112 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
11.9.4 External Crystal Oscillator  
Table 11-80. ECO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
F
Crystal frequency range  
4
25  
MHz  
11.9.5 External Clock Reference  
[63]  
Table 11-81. External Clock Reference AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
External frequency range  
Input duty cycle range  
Input edge rate  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
33  
70  
Units  
MHz  
%
0
50  
Measured at V  
/2  
30  
0.1  
DDIO  
V
to V  
V/ns  
IL  
IH  
11.9.6 Phase-Locked Loop  
Table 11-82. PLL DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
PLL operating current  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
400  
200  
Max  
Units  
µA  
I
In = 3 MHz, Out = 67 MHz  
In = 3 MHz, Out = 24 MHz  
DD  
µA  
Table 11-83. PLL AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
1
Typ  
Max  
48  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
µs  
[61]  
Fpllin  
PLL input frequency  
[62]  
PLL intermediate frequency  
Output of prescaler  
1
3
[61]  
Fpllout  
PLL output frequency  
24  
67  
Lock time at startup  
250  
250  
[63]  
Jperiod-rms Jitter (rms)  
ps  
Notes  
61. This specification is guaranteed by testing the PLL across the specified range using the IMO as the source for the PLL.  
62. PLL input divider, Q, must be set so that the input frequency is divided down to the intermediate frequency range. Value for Q ranges from 1 to 16.  
63. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 113 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
12. Ordering Information  
In addition to the features listed in Table 12-1, every CY8C36 device includes: a precision on-chip voltage reference, precision  
2
oscillators, flash, ECC, DMA, a fixed function I C, 4 KB trace RAM, JTAG/SWD programming and debug, external memory interface,  
and more. In addition to these features, the flexible UDBs and analog subsection support a wide range of peripherals. To assist you  
in selecting the ideal part, PSoC Creator makes a part recommendation after you choose the components required by your application.  
All CY8C36 derivatives incorporate device and flash security in user-selectable security levels; see the TRM for details.  
Table 12-1. CY8C36 Family with Single Cycle 8051  
[66]  
MCU Core  
Analog  
Digital  
I/O  
Part Number  
Package  
JTAG ID[67]  
32 KB Flash  
CY8C3665AXI-010 67 32  
CY8C3665PVI-008 67 32  
CY8C3665AXI-016 67 32  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
2
2
2
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
4
70 62  
29 25  
72 62  
48 38  
31 25  
31 25  
29 25  
8
4
8
8
4
4
4
0
0
2
2
2
2
0
100-pin TQFP 0×1E00A069  
48-pin SSOP 0×1E008069  
100-pin TQFP 0×1E010069  
4
4
4
4
4
4
CY8C3665LTI-044  
CY8C3665LTI-006  
67 32  
67 32  
68-pin QFN  
48-pin QFN  
48-pin SSOP  
48-pin SSOP  
0×1E02C069  
0×1E006069  
0×1E007069  
0×1E050069  
CY8C3665PVI-007 67 32  
CY8C3665PVI-080 67 32  
64 KB Flash  
CY8C3666AXI-052 67 64  
CY8C3666AXI-036 67 64  
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
4
4
4
4
4
70 62  
72 62  
48 38  
31 25  
70 62  
8
8
8
4
8
0
2
2
2
0
100-pin TQFP 0×1E034069  
100-pin TQFP 0×1E024069  
CY8C3666LTI-027  
CY8C3666LTI-050  
67 64  
67 64  
68-pin QFN  
48-pin QFN  
0×1E01B069  
0×1E032069  
CY8C3666AXI-037 67 64  
100-pin TQFP 0×1E025069  
Notes  
64. Analog blocks support a wide variety of functionality including TIA, PGA, and mixers. See the Example Peripherals on page 39 for more information on how analog  
blocks can be used.  
65. UDBs support a wide variety of functionality including SPI, LIN, UART, timer, counter, PWM, PRS, and others. Individual functions may use a fraction of a UDB or  
multiple UDBs. Multiple functions can share a single UDB. See the Example Peripherals on page 39 for more information on how UDBs can be used.  
66. The I/O Count includes all types of digital I/O: GPIO, SIO, and the two USB I/O. See the I/O System and Routing on page 32 for details on the functionality of each of  
these types of I/O.  
67. The JTAG ID has three major fields. The most significant nibble (left digit) is the version, followed by a 2 byte part number and a 3 nibble manufacturer ID.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 114 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
12.1 Part Numbering Conventions  
PSoC 3 devices follow the part numbering convention described here. All fields are single character alphanumeric (0, 1, 2, …, 9, A,  
B, …, Z) unless stated otherwise.  
CY8Cabcdefg-xxx  
„ a: Architecture  
‡ 3: PSoC 3  
‡ 5: PSoC 5  
„ ef: Package code  
‡ Two character alphanumeric  
‡ AX: TQFP  
‡ LT: QFN  
‡ PV: SSOP  
„ b: Family group within architecture  
‡ 4: CY8C34 family  
„ g: Temperature range  
‡ C: commercial  
‡ I: industrial  
‡ 6: CY8C36 family  
‡ 8: CY8C38 family  
„ c: Speed grade  
‡ 4: 48 MHz  
‡ A: automotive  
„ xxx: Peripheral set  
‡ 6: 67 MHz  
‡ Three character numeric  
‡ No meaning is associated with these three characters.  
„ d: Flash capacity  
‡ 4: 16 KB  
‡ 5: 32 KB  
‡ 6: 64 KB  
CY8C  
3
6
6
6
P
V
I
-
x x x  
Example  
Cypress Prefix  
Architecture  
3: PSoC 3  
6: CY8C36 Family  
6: 67 MHz  
6: 64 KB  
Family Group within Architecture  
Speed Grade  
Flash Capacity  
PV: SSOP  
Package Code  
I: Industrial  
Temperature Range  
Peripheral Set  
All devices in the PSoC 3 CY8C36 family comply to RoHS-6 specifications, demonstrating the commitment by Cypress to lead-free  
products. Lead (Pb) is an alloying element in solders that has resulted in environmental concerns due to potential toxicity. Cypress  
uses nickel-palladium-gold (NiPdAu) technology for the majority of leadframe-based packages.  
A high level review of the Cypress Pb-free position is available on our website. Specific package information is also available. Package  
Material Declaration data sheets (PMDDs) identify all substances contained within Cypress packages. PMDDs also confirm the  
absence of many banned substances. The information in the PMDDs will help Cypress customers plan for recycling or other “end of  
life” requirements.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 115 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
13. Packaging  
Table 13-1. Package Characteristics  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
–40  
–40  
Typ  
25.00  
Max  
85  
100  
Units  
°C  
T
Operating ambient temperature  
Operating junction temperature  
A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
°C  
J
Package θ (48-pin SSOP)  
49  
°C/Watt  
°C/Watt  
°C/Watt  
°C/Watt  
°C/Watt  
°C/Watt  
°C/Watt  
°C/Watt  
JA  
JA  
JA  
JA  
JC  
JC  
JC  
JC  
JA  
Package θ (48-pin QFN)  
14  
JA  
Package θ (68-pin QFN)  
15  
JA  
Package θ (100-pin TQFP)  
34  
JA  
Package θ (48-pin SSOP)  
24  
JC  
Package θ (48-pin QFN)  
15  
JC  
Package θ (68-pin QFN)  
13  
JC  
Package θ (100-pin TQFP)  
10  
JC  
Table 13-2. Solder Reflow Peak Temperature  
Maximum Peak  
Package  
Maximum Time at Peak  
Temperature  
Temperature  
48-pin SSOP  
48-pin QFN  
68-pin QFN  
100-pin TQFP  
260 °C  
260 °C  
260 °C  
260 °C  
30 seconds  
30 seconds  
30 seconds  
30 seconds  
Table 13-3. Package Moisture Sensitivity Level (MSL), IPC/JEDEC J-STD-2  
Package  
48-pin SSOP  
48-pin QFN  
68-pin QFN  
100-pin TQFP  
MSL  
MSL 3  
MSL 3  
MSL 3  
MSL 3  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 116 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 13-1. 48-pin (300 mil) SSOP Package Outline  
.020  
24  
1
0.395  
0.420  
0.292  
0.299  
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MIN.  
MAX.  
25  
48  
0.620  
0.630  
0.005  
0.010  
SEATING PLANE  
.010  
0.088  
0.092  
0.095  
0.110  
GAUGE PLANE  
0.024  
0.040  
0.004  
0.025  
BSC  
0°-8°  
0.008  
0.016  
0.008  
51-85061-*D  
0.0135  
Figure 13-2. 48-pin QFN Package Outline  
SIDE VIEW  
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
1.00 MAX.  
0.05 MAX.  
7.00±0.10  
5.6±0.10  
PIN 1 ID  
0.23±0.05  
0.20 REF.  
48  
37  
37  
48  
36  
36  
1
1
PIN 1 DOT  
LASER MARK  
SOLDERABLE  
EXPOSED  
PAD  
7.00±0.10  
5.55 REF  
5.6±0.10  
12  
25  
12  
25  
0.40±0.10  
24  
13  
13  
24  
0.50±0.10  
5.55 REF  
0.08  
C
NOTES:  
1. HATCH AREA IS SOLDERABLE EXPOSED METAL.  
2. REFERENCE JEDEC#: MO-220  
3. PACKAGE WEIGHT: 0.13g  
4. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM [MIN/MAX]  
5. PACKAGE CODE  
001- 45616 *B  
PART #  
LT48D  
DESCRIPTION  
LEAD FREE  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 117 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Figure 13-3. 68-pin QFN 8×8 with 0.4 mm Pitch Package Outline (Sawn Version)  
TOP VIEW  
SIDE VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.900±0.100  
5.7±0.10  
8.000±0.100  
0.200 REF  
PIN1 ID  
R 0.20  
0.400 PITCH  
5
2
6
8
5
2
6
8
1
5
1
5
1
1
PIN 1 DOT  
SOLDERABLE  
EXPOSED  
PAD  
LASER MARK  
5.7±0.10  
0.20±0.05  
1
7
3
5
1
7
3
0.400±0.1005  
3
4
1
8
0.05 MAX  
3
4
1
8
6.40 REF  
NOTES:  
1. HATCH AREA IS SOLDERABLE EXPOSED METAL.  
001-09618 *C  
2. REFERENCE JEDEC#: MO-220  
3. PACKAGE WEIGHT: 0.17g  
4. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS  
Figure 13-4. 100-pin TQFP (14 × 14 × 1.4 mm) Package Outline  
51-85048 *E  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 118 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)  
14. Acronyms  
Acronym  
FIR  
Description  
finite impulse response, see also IIR  
flash patch and breakpoint  
full-speed  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document  
Acronym  
abus  
Description  
FPB  
FS  
analog local bus  
ADC  
AG  
analog-to-digital converter  
analog global  
GPIO  
general-purpose input/output, applies to a PSoC  
pin  
AHB  
AMBA (advanced microcontroller bus archi-  
tecture) high-performance bus, an ARM data  
transfer bus  
HVI  
IC  
high-voltage interrupt, see also LVI, LVD  
integrated circuit  
ALU  
arithmetic logic unit  
IDAC  
IDE  
current DAC, see also DAC, VDAC  
integrated development environment  
AMUXBUS analog multiplexer bus  
2
API  
application programming interface  
I C, or IIC  
Inter-Integrated Circuit, a communications  
protocol  
APSR  
application program status register  
advanced RISC machine, a CPU architecture  
automatic thump mode  
IIR  
infinite impulse response, see also FIR  
internal low-speed oscillator, see also IMO  
internal main oscillator, see also ILO  
integral nonlinearity, see also DNL  
input/output, see also GPIO, DIO, SIO, USBIO  
initial power-on reset  
®
ARM  
ILO  
IMO  
INL  
ATM  
BW  
bandwidth  
CAN  
Controller Area Network, a communications  
protocol  
I/O  
CMRR  
CPU  
common-mode rejection ratio  
central processing unit  
IPOR  
IPSR  
IRQ  
ITM  
LCD  
LIN  
interrupt program status register  
interrupt request  
CRC  
cyclic redundancy check, an error-checking  
protocol  
instrumentation trace macrocell  
liquid crystal display  
DAC  
DFB  
DIO  
digital-to-analog converter, see also IDAC, VDAC  
digital filter block  
Local Interconnect Network, a communications  
protocol.  
digital input/output, GPIO with only digital  
capabilities, no analog. See GPIO.  
LR  
link register  
DMA  
DNL  
direct memory access, see also TD  
differential nonlinearity, see also INL  
do not use  
LUT  
LVD  
LVI  
lookup table  
low-voltage detect, see also LVI  
low-voltage interrupt, see also HVI  
low-voltage transistor-transistor logic  
multiply-accumulate  
DNU  
DR  
port write data registers  
digital system interconnect  
data watchpoint and trace  
error correcting code  
LVTTL  
MAC  
MCU  
MISO  
NC  
DSI  
DWT  
ECC  
ECO  
EEPROM  
microcontroller unit  
master-in slave-out  
external crystal oscillator  
no connect  
electrically erasable programmable read-only  
memory  
NMI  
nonmaskable interrupt  
non-return-to-zero  
NRZ  
NVIC  
NVL  
opamp  
PAL  
EMI  
electromagnetic interference  
external memory interface  
end of conversion  
nested vectored interrupt controller  
nonvolatile latch, see also WOL  
operational amplifier  
EMIF  
EOC  
EOF  
EPSR  
ESD  
ETM  
end of frame  
programmable array logic, see also PLD  
program counter  
execution program status register  
electrostatic discharge  
embedded trace macrocell  
PC  
PCB  
PGA  
printed circuit board  
programmable gain amplifier  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 119 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)  
Acronym Description  
PHUB  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)  
Acronym  
SOF  
Description  
peripheral hub  
physical layer  
start of frame  
PHY  
PICU  
PLA  
SPI  
Serial Peripheral Interface, a communications  
protocol  
port interrupt control unit  
programmable logic array  
programmable logic device, see also PAL  
phase-locked loop  
SR  
slew rate  
SRAM  
SRES  
SWD  
SWV  
TD  
static random access memory  
software reset  
PLD  
PLL  
serial wire debug, a test protocol  
single-wire viewer  
PMDD  
POR  
PRES  
PRS  
PS  
package material declaration data sheet  
power-on reset  
transaction descriptor, see also DMA  
total harmonic distortion  
transimpedance amplifier  
technical reference manual  
transistor-transistor logic  
transmit  
precise power-on reset  
THD  
TIA  
pseudo random sequence  
port read data register  
TRM  
TTL  
®
PSoC  
PSRR  
PWM  
RAM  
RISC  
RMS  
RTC  
RTL  
Programmable System-on-Chip™  
power supply rejection ratio  
pulse-width modulator  
TX  
UART  
Universal Asynchronous Transmitter Receiver, a  
communications protocol  
random-access memory  
reduced-instruction-set computing  
root-mean-square  
UDB  
universal digital block  
Universal Serial Bus  
USB  
real-time clock  
USBIO  
USB input/output, PSoC pins used to connect to  
a USB port  
register transfer language  
remote transmission request  
receive  
RTR  
RX  
VDAC  
WDT  
voltage DAC, see also DAC, IDAC  
watchdog timer  
SAR  
SC/CT  
SCL  
successive approximation register  
switched capacitor/continuous time  
WOL  
write once latch, see also NVL  
watchdog timer reset  
external reset I/O pin  
crystal  
WRES  
XRES  
XTAL  
2
I C serial clock  
2
SDA  
S/H  
I C serial data  
sample and hold  
15. Reference Documents  
SINAD  
SIO  
signal to noise and distortion ratio  
PSoC® 3, PSoC® 5 Architecture TRM  
PSoC® 3 Registers TRM  
special input/output, GPIO with advanced  
features. See GPIO.  
SOC  
start of conversion  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 120 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
16. Document Conventions  
16.1 Units of Measure  
Table 16-1. Units of Measure  
Symbol  
°C  
Unit of Measure  
degrees Celsius  
decibels  
dB  
fF  
femtofarads  
hertz  
Hz  
KB  
kbps  
Khr  
kHz  
kΩ  
1024 bytes  
kilobits per second  
kilohours  
kilohertz  
kilohms  
ksps  
LSB  
Mbps  
MHz  
MΩ  
Msps  
µA  
kilosamples per second  
least significant bit  
megabits per second  
megahertz  
megaohms  
megasamples per second  
microamperes  
microfarads  
microhenrys  
microseconds  
microvolts  
µF  
µH  
µs  
µV  
µW  
mA  
ms  
mV  
nA  
microwatts  
milliamperes  
milliseconds  
millivolts  
nanoamperes  
nanoseconds  
nanovolts  
ns  
nV  
Ω
ohms  
pF  
picofarads  
ppm  
ps  
parts per million  
picoseconds  
seconds  
s
sps  
sqrtHz  
V
samples per second  
square root of hertz  
volts  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 121 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
17. Revision History  
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
Document Number: 001-53413  
Submission Orig. of  
Rev.  
ECN No.  
Description of Change  
Date  
Change  
**  
2714854  
2758970  
06/04/09  
09/02/09  
PVKV  
New data sheet  
*A  
MKEA  
Updated Part Numbering Conventions  
Added Section 11.7.5 (EMIF Figures and Tables)  
Updated GPIO and SIO AC specifications  
Updated XRES Pin Description and Xdata Address Map specifications  
Updated DFB and Comparator specifications  
Updated PHUB features section and RTC in sleep mode  
Updated IDAC and VDAC DC and Analog Global specifications  
Updated USBIO AC and Delta Sigma ADC specifications  
Updated PPOR and Voltage Monitors DC specifications  
Updated Drive Mode diagram  
Added 48-QFN Information  
Updated other electrical specifications  
*B  
2824546  
12/09/09  
MKEA  
Updated I2C section to reflect 1 Mbps. Updated Table 11-6 and 11-7 (Boost AC  
and DC specs); also added Shottky Diode specs. Changed current for  
sleep/hibernate mode to include SIO; Added footnote to analog global specs.  
Updated Figures 1-1, 6-2, 7-14, and 8-1. Updated Table 6-2 and Table 6-3  
(Hibernate and Sleep rows) and Power Modes section. Updated GPIO and SIO  
AC specifications. Updated Gain error in IDAC and VDAC specifications.  
Updated description of V  
spec in Table 11-1 and removed GPIO Clamp  
DDA  
Current parameter. Updated number of UDBs on page 1.  
Moved FILO from ILO DC to AC table.  
Added PCB Layout and PCB Schematic diagrams.  
Updated Fgpioout spec (Table 11-9). Added duty cycle frequency in PLL AC spec  
table. Added note for Sleep and Hibernate modes and Active Mode specs in Table  
11-2. Linked URL in Section 10.3 to PSoC Creator site.  
Updated Ja and Jc values in Table 13-1. Updated Single Sample Mode and Fast  
FIR Mode sections. Updated Input Resistance specification in Del-Sig ADC table.  
Added Tio_init parameter. Updated PGA and UGB AC Specs. Removed SPC  
ADC. Updated Boost Converter section.  
Added section 'SIO as Comparator'; updated Hysteresis spec (differential mode)  
in Table 11-10.  
Updated V  
condition and deleted Vstart parameter in Table 11-6.  
BAT  
Added 'Bytes' column for Tables 4-1 to 4-5.  
*C  
2873322  
02/04/10  
MKEA  
Changed maximum value of PPOR_TR to '1'. Updated V  
specification.  
BIAS  
Updated PCB Schematic. Updated Figure 8-1 and Figure 6-3. Updated Interrupt  
Vector table, Updated Sales links. Updated JTAG and SWD specifications.  
Removed Jp-p and Jperiod from ECO AC Spec table. Added note on sleep timer  
in Table 11-2. Updated ILO AC and DC specifications. Added Resolution  
parameter in VDAC and IDAC tables. Updated I  
typical and maximum values.  
OUT  
Changed Temperature Sensor range to –40 °C to +85 °C. Removed Latchup  
specification from Table 11-1.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 122 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
Document Number: 001-53413  
*D 2903576 04/01/10  
MKEA  
Updated Vb pin in PCB Schematic  
Updated Tstartup parameter in AC Specifications table  
Added Load regulation and Line regulation parameters to Inductive Boost  
Regulator DC Specifications table  
Updated I parameter in LCD Direct Drive DC Specs table  
CC  
Updated I  
parameter in LCD Direct Drive DC Specs table  
OUT  
Updated Table 6-2 and Table 6-3  
Added bullets on CapSense in page 1; added CapSense column in Section 12  
Removed some references to footnote [1]  
Changed INC_Rn cycles from 3 to 2 (Table 4-1)  
Added footnote in PLL AC Specification table  
Added PLL intermediate frequency row with footnote in PLL AC Specs table  
Added UDBs subsection under 11.6 Digital Peripherals  
Updated Figure 2-6 (PCB Layout)  
Updated Pin Descriptions section and modified Figures 6-6, 6-8, 6-9  
Updated LVD in Tables 6-2 and 6-3; modified Low-power modes bullet in page 1  
Added note to Figures 2-5 and 6-2; Updated Figure 6-2 to add capacitors for V  
DDA  
and V  
Changed V  
pins.  
DDD  
from 0.9 to 0.1%  
REF  
Updated boost converter section (6.2.2)  
Updated Tstartup values in Table 11-3.  
Removed IPOR rows from Table 11-68. Updated 6.3.1.1, Power Voltage Level  
Monitors.  
Updated section 5.2 and Table 11-2 to correct suggestion of execution from flash.  
Updated V  
specs in Table 11-21.  
REF  
Updated IDAC uncompensated gain error in Table 11-25.  
Updated Delay from Interrupt signal input to ISR code execution from ISR code  
in Table11- 72. Removed other line in table.  
Added sentence to last paragraph of section 6.1.1.3.  
Updated T  
, high and low-power modes, in Table 11-24.  
RESP  
Updated f_TCK values in Table 11-73 and f_SWDCK values in Table 11-74.  
Updated SNR condition in Table 11-20.  
Corrected unit of measurement in Table 11-21.  
Updated sleep wakeup time in Table 6-3 and Tsleep in Table 11-3.  
Added 1.71 V <= V  
< 3.3 V, SWD over USBIO pins value to Table 11-74.  
DDD  
Removed mention of hibernate reset (HRES) from page 1 features, Table 6-3,  
Section 6.2.1.4, Section 6.3, and Section 6.3.1.1. Change PPOR/PRES to TBDs  
in Section 6.3.1.1, Section 6.4.1.6 (changed PPOR to reset), Table 11-3 (changed  
PPOR to PRES), Table 11-68 (changed title, values TBD), and Table 11-69  
(changed PPOR_TR to PRES_TR).  
Added sentence saying that LVD  
circuits can generate a reset to Section 6.3.1.1.  
Changed I values on page 1, page 5, and Table 11-2.  
DD  
Changed resume time value in Section 6.2.1.3.  
Changed ESD HBM value in Table 11-1.  
Changed sample rate row in Table 11-20.  
Removed V  
= 1.65 V rows and changed BWag value in Table 11-22.  
values and changed CMRR value in Table 11-23.  
DDA  
Changed V  
IOFF  
Changed INL max value in Table 11-27.  
Added max value to the Quiescent current specs in Tables 11-29 and 11-31.  
Changed occurrences of “Block” to “Row” and deleted the “ECC not included”  
footnote in Table 11-57.  
Changed max response time value in Tables 11-69 and 11-71.  
Changed the Startup time in Table 11-79.  
Added condition to intermediate frequency row in Table 11-85.  
Added row to Table 11-69.  
Added brown out note to Section 11.8.1.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 123 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
Document Number: 001-53413  
*E  
2938381  
05/27/10  
MKEA  
Replaced V  
with V  
in USBIO diagram and specification tables, added  
DDD  
DDIO  
text in USBIO section of Electrical Specifications.  
Added Table 13-2 (Package MSL)  
Modified Tstorag condition and changed max spec to 100  
Added bullet (Pass) under ALU (section 7.2.2.2)  
Added figures for kHzECO and MHzECO in the External Oscillator section  
Updated Figure 6-1(Clocking Subsystem diagram)  
Removed CPUCLK_DIV in table 5-2, Deleted Clock Divider SFR subsection  
Updated PSoC Creator Framework image  
Updated SIO DC Specifications (V and V parameters)  
IH  
IL  
Updated bullets in Clocking System and Clocking Distribution sections  
Updated Figure 8-2  
Updated PCB Layout and Schematic, updated as per MTRB review comments  
Updated Table 6-3 (power changed to current)  
In 32kHZ EC DC Specifications table, changed I Max to 0.25  
CC  
In IMO DC Specifications table, updated Supply Current values  
Updated GPIO DC Specs table  
*F  
2958674  
2989685  
06/22/10  
08/04/10  
SHEA  
MKEA  
Minor ECN to post data sheet to external website  
*G  
Added USBIO 22 ohm DP and DM resistors to Simplified Block Diagram  
Added to Table 6-6 a footnote and references to same.  
Added sentences to the resistive pull-up and pull-down description bullets.  
Added sentence to Section 6.4.11, Adjustable Output Level.  
Updated section 5.5 External Memory Interface  
Updated Table 11-73 JTAG Interface AC Specifications  
Updated Table 11-74 SWD Interface AC Specifications  
Updated style changes as per the new template.  
*H  
*I  
3078568  
11/04/10  
MKEA  
MKEA  
Updated “Current Digital-to-analog Converter (IDAC)” on page 86  
Updated “Voltage Digital to Analog Converter (VDAC)” on page 91  
Updated “DC Specifications” on page 65  
Updated “Voltage Reference Specifications” on page 85  
3107314 12/10/2010  
Updated delta-sigma tables and graphs.  
Updated Flash AC specs  
Formatted table 11.2.  
Updated interrupt controller table  
Updated transimpedance amplifier section  
Updated SIO DC specs table  
Updated Voltage Monitors DC Specifications table  
Updated LCD Direct Drive DC specs table  
Replaced the Discrete Time Mixer and Continuous Time Mixer tables with Mixer  
DC and AC specs tables  
Updated ESD  
value.  
HBM  
Updated IDAC and VDAC sections  
Removed ESO parts from ordering information  
Changed USBIO pins from NC to DNU and removed redundant USBIO pin  
description notes  
Updated POR with brown out DC and AC specs  
Updated PGA AC specs  
Updated 32 kHz External Crystal DC Specifications  
Updated opamp AC specs  
Updated XRES IO specs  
Updated Inductive boost regulator section  
Delta sigma ADC spec updates  
Updated comparator section  
Removed buzz mode from Power Mode Transition diagram  
Updated opamp DC and AC spec tables  
Updated PGA DC table  
*J  
3179219  
02/22/2011  
MKEA  
Updated conditions for flash data retention time.  
Updated 100-pin TQFP package spec.  
Updated EEPROM AC specifications.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 124 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family Data Sheet Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
Document Number: 001-53413  
*K 3200146 03/28/2011  
MKEA  
Removed Preliminary status from the data sheet.  
Updated JTAG ID  
Deleted Cin_G1, ADC input capacitance from Delta-Sigma ADC DC spec table  
Updated JTAG Interface AC Specifications and SWD Interface Specifications  
tables  
Updated USBIO DC specs  
Added 0.01 to max speed  
Updated Features on page 1  
Added Section 5.5, Nonvolatile Latches  
Updated Flash AC specs  
Added CAN DC specs  
Updated delta-sigma graphs, noise histogram figures and RMS Noise spec tables  
Add reference to application note AN58304 in section 8.1  
Updated 100-pin TQFP package spec  
Added oscillator, I/O, VDAC, regulator graphs  
Updated JTAG/SWD timing diagrams  
Updated GPIO and SIO AC specs  
Updated POR with Brown Out AC spec table  
Updated IDAC graphs  
Added DMA timing diagram, interrupt timing and interrupt vector, I2C timing  
diagrams  
Updated opamp graphs and PGA graphs  
Added full chip performance graphs  
Changed MHzECO range.  
Added “Solder Reflow Peak Temperature” table.  
*L  
3259185  
05/17/2011  
MKEA  
Added JTAG and SWD interface connection diagrams  
Updated T and T values in Table 13-1  
JA  
JC  
Changed typ and max values for the TCVos parameter in Opamp DC  
specifications table.  
Updated Clocking subsystem diagram.  
Changed Vssd to Vssb in the PSoC Power System diagram  
Updated Ordering information.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Page 125 of 126  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Family  
Data Sheet  
18. Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information  
Worldwide Sales and Design Support  
Cypress maintains a worldwide network of offices, solution centers, manufacturers’ representatives, and distributors. To find the office  
closest to you, visit us at Cypress Locations.  
Products  
PSoC Solutions  
Automotive  
cypress.com/go/automotive  
cypress.com/go/clocks  
cypress.com/go/interface  
cypress.com/go/powerpsoc  
cypress.com/go/plc  
psoc.cypress.com/solutions  
PSoC 1 | PSoC 3 | PSoC 5  
Clocks & Buffers  
Interface  
Lighting & Power Control  
Memory  
cypress.com/go/memory  
cypress.com/go/image  
cypress.com/go/psoc  
Optical & Image Sensing  
PSoC  
Touch Sensing  
USB Controllers  
Wireless/RF  
cypress.com/go/touch  
cypress.com/go/USB  
cypress.com/go/wireless  
© Cypress Semiconductor Corporation, 2009-2011. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Cypress Semiconductor Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use of  
any circuitry other than circuitry embodied in a Cypress product. Nor does it convey or imply any license under patent or other rights. Cypress products are not warranted nor intended to be used for  
medical, life support, life saving, critical control or safety applications, unless pursuant to an express written agreement with Cypress. Furthermore, Cypress does not authorize its products for use as  
critical components in life-support systems where a malfunction or failure may reasonably be expected to result in significant injury to the user. The inclusion of Cypress products in life-support systems  
application implies that the manufacturer assumes all risk of such use and in doing so indemnifies Cypress against all charges.  
Any Source Code (software and/or firmware) is owned by Cypress Semiconductor Corporation (Cypress) and is protected by and subject to worldwide patent protection (United States and foreign),  
United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Cypress hereby grants to licensee a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to copy, use, modify, create derivative works of,  
and compile the Cypress Source Code and derivative works for the sole purpose of creating custom software and or firmware in support of licensee product to be used only in conjunction with a Cypress  
integrated circuit as specified in the applicable agreement. Any reproduction, modification, translation, compilation, or representation of this Source Code except as specified above is prohibited without  
the express written permission of Cypress.  
Disclaimer: CYPRESS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Cypress reserves the right to make changes without further notice to the materials described herein. Cypress does not  
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein. Cypress does not authorize its products for use as critical components in life-support systems where  
a malfunction or failure may reasonably be expected to result in significant injury to the user. The inclusion of Cypress’ product in a life-support systems application implies that the manufacturer  
assumes all risk of such use and in doing so indemnifies Cypress against all charges.  
Use may be limited by and subject to the applicable Cypress software license agreement.  
Document Number: 001-53413 Rev. *L  
Revised May 20, 2011  
Page 126 of 126  
CapSense®, PSoC® 3, PSoC® 5, and PSoC® Creator™ are trademarks and PSoC® is a registered trademark of Cypress Semiconductor Corp. All other trademarks or registered trademarks referenced  
herein are property of the respective corporations.  
Purchase of I2C components from Cypress or one of its sublicensed Associated Companies conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent Rights to use these components in an I2C system, provided  
that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips.  
ARM is a registered trademark, and Keil, and RealView are trademarks, of ARM Limited. All products and company names mentioned in this document may be the trademarks of their respective holders.  

相关型号:

CY8C3666LTI-028

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666LTI-042

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666LTI-046

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666LTI-050

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666LTI-201

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666LTI-203

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVA-022

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PDSO48, 0.300 INCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, SSOP-48
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVA-026

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PDSO48, 0.300 INCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, SSOP-48
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVA-180

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PDSO48, 0.300 INCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, SSOP-48
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVI-022

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVI-026

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVI-041

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS